Giao an anh 7

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (959.82 KB, 291 trang )

(1)Teaching date: 7A:…./ 08/ 2011. Period: 1. GUIDING THE WAY OF USING, LEARNING ENGLISH 7 AND REVIEW. I. Objective By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review,consolidate the knowledge learned in class 6. 2. Skill: Speaking and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love English, study seriously. II. Preparation 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book,sub board. 2. Students’: Text book, note book. III. Procedure 1. Organization: (1’) 7A:……./ 17 out:……………… 2. Check up: No check the old leson. 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up : (5’) T: Ask Ss some questions: + What’s your name? - My name is …… + How old are you? - I’m ……. + What do you do? - I am a student. + Where do you live? - …………………….. Ss: Answer. 3.2. Present the way of using and (17’) learning English 7: T: Presents structure of English 7: 1. Structure of English 7: Ss: Listen and write down. - There are 16 Units. Each Unit has two or three parts A, B (C). After 2 or 3 Units, there a part “ Grammar practice”. T: Presents the way of learning English 3. The way of learning English 7: 7. + Speaking: + How do you learn to speak English? - Practise speaking to friends, use pictures. Ss: Answer. - Repeat the record..

(2) T: How do you learn to listen English? Ss: Answer.. T: How do you learn to read English? Ss: Answer. T: Guides. T: How do you learn to write English? Ss: Answer. T: Guides. T: Guides the way of learnging vocabulary. Ss: Listen.. T: Guides Ss the way of learning structures.. 3.3 Riview: (15’) T: Asks Ss to repeat the main grammar learned in class 6 Ss: Repeat: T: Helps Ss to repeat.. + Listening: - Listen and repeat, listen and fill the missing words in the blankets, listen and read. - Usually listen the record in class or at home. - Listen to the news on TV. + Reading: - Read aloud the dialogues. - Read silence, answer the questions. + Writing: - Practise writing the simple sentences. + Vocabulary: Write a word once or one more time, make sentences. Make sentences with newwords. Ex: student - I am a student. + Grammar: - Make a new sentence with structure. Ex: I live in Hue. She lives in Ha Noi. + Present simple with "be”: Ex: I’m fine. I’m 10 years old. I’m a student. + Ordinary verb:-s,. –es. Present continuous tense. S + am/ is/are + V-ing. Ex: I am watching TV. She is looking for the key. We are learning English. (?) Is/Are +S +V-ing..

(3) + a/an/some/any: Ex: I have a book. She has an apple. There is some fruit. There isn’t any milk. + Adverbs of frequency: always, usually, often sometimes, never. +Indefinite quantifiers: a few, alittle, a lot, lots. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Asks Ss to give some sentences with grammar learned.Gives Ss to practice in pairs about personal information. Ex: A: What’s your name? B: I’m Hoa. T: Corrects mistakes. 5. Homework: (2’) - Prepare:Unit 1.Back to school- A. 1,3,4,5 * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy : …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:….../ 08/ 2011. Period: 2. UNIT 1: BACK TO SCHOOL A1,3,4,5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to greet and get to know to answer with the greetings of people. - Ss know the way of presenting about a new friend, the way of greeting and answering with new people “Nice to see you”, "Nice to meet you”. 2. Skill: Pairwork.To develop listening and speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love friends, study seriously..

(4) II. Preparation 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, tape, cassette. 2. Students’: Text book, work book. III. Procedure: 1. Organization: (1’) 7A: ……/ 17 out:…………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement:Answer some questions: + What’s your name ? + How old are you ? + Where do you live ? + How far is it from your house to school ? + What did you do yesterday? + What are you doing now ? * Key: My name is ……….. I’m ……years old. I live in …………… It’s about ……..kilometer/meter. I (stayed) at home. I am studying English. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up : (5’) * Slap the board: T: Asks Ss to listen and slap the Good Yes, I suitable response.2 teams play which bye am. team slap many words that team will Very well. win. Class Thanks. 1.What’s your name? 7 2.How are you today? 3.Which class are you in? My name’s Hoa. 4.Goodbye. 5.Are you a new student? Ss: Play game. 3.2. Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures on page 10.

(5) Ss: Look at the picture and describe. T: Plays the tape tiwce. Ss: Listen. T: Presents and helps Ss to practise newwords. Ss: Write down and practice. T: Presents the structures:. T: Presents some greetings matching. (use sub board). Ss: Match the sentenses.. by. * Vocabulary: - classmate: bạn cùng lớp - also: cũng vậy - to meet: gặp * Structures: + Nice to see you. + Nice to meet you. + So am I. Ex: A: I’m in class7. B: So am I. * Matching: 1. Pretty good a.kh«ng t«t l¾m. 2. How is every b.T«I còng vËy. thing? 3. Nice to see c.Kh¸ tèt. you. 4. So am I/Me, d.Mäi viÖc nh too. thÕ nµo? 5. Just fine. e.RÊt vui khi gÆp b¹n. 6. Not bad. f.B×nh thêng th«i. *Answers: 1-c ; 2-d ; 3-e ; 4-b ; 5-f ; 6-a.. 3.3. Practice: (18’) 1. Practice with a partner the T: Plays the tape a,b. dialogues and answer the Ss: Listen. questions: (A.1,3) T: Asks Ss to practice in groups of 3 the 5’ dialogues. Ss: Work in group of three. T: Calls on some groups to practice in front of the class. Ss: Practice in front of the class. T: Corrects Ss’ mistakes..

(6) T: Asks Ss to answer the questions. Ss: Find information to answer. T: Calls some Ss to give their answers . Ss: Give the answers . T: Corrects and gives the right answers. Ss: Write down.. T: Asks Ss to make the same dialogues. Ss: Work in group of three. T: Checks one or two groups. Ss: Say. T: Listen and corrects.. T: Asks Ss to fill in the dialogues in group of six. Ss: Work in groupof six. T: Plays the tape twice. Ss: Listen and check. T: Checks the anwers of the groups. Ss: Give the answers T: Plays the tape one more time and gives the answers( By sub-board) . Ss: Check again. T: Calls Ss to read the dialogues. Ss: Read aloud.. T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures. Ss: look at the pictures T: Asks Ss to listen and write the letters of the dialogues in the order they hear. Ss: Listen and write the letters of the. 6’. * Keys: a. Her name is Hoa. b. She is in class 7A. c. Nam is also in class 7A. Example: Tuan: Goodmorning. My name’s Tuan. Hung: Nice to meet you, Tuan. My name’s Hung. Are you a new student? Tuan: Yes. I’m in class 7A. Hung: Oh, So am I. 2. Listen and complete the dialogue:. * Key: a, Mr.Tan: … How are you? Miss Lien: Pretty good, …. How about you, Tan? Mr.Tan: Not bad,……. Miss.Lien; Me, too. b, Nam: …….How is every thing? Nga: Ok. How are you today, Nam? Nam: Just fine. Nam: …..So am I. 3. Listen and write the letters of the dialogues in the order you hear..

(7) dialogues in the order. T: Checks the answers. *Answers: Ss: Give the answers. c–b –d–d–a. T: Gives the key. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeat the main contents of this lesson. T: Encourages Ss to use the new greeting expression from the matching Ba and Nam Ba …..morning. Nam …..morning Nice……again. …Thanks…. .about…?. ….Thank you. Goodbye………. Ba: Goodmorning,Nam. Nam: Goodmorning, Ba. Nice to see you again. Ba: Me,too/Nice to see you, too. How is every thing? Nam: Not bad, Thanks. How about you? Ba : Pretty good. Thank you. Goodbye. See you later.. Nam: Bye Ss: Practise in pairs. T: Calls some groups to practise structures “ Nice to meet you”: S1: Goodmorning. My name’s S1. S2: Nice to meet you S1. My name’s S2. Are you a new student? S1: Yes. I’m in class 7A. S2: Oh, So am I. T: Corrects Ss’ mistakes. 5. Homework: (1’) - Do exercise: 3/ 4 in workbook. - Prepare: A2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy ............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 3 7A:...../ 08/ 2011 UNIT 1: BACK TO SCHOOL. A.2.

(8) I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the text. Read and answer the questions about Hoa. 2. Skill: To develop reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love friends, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, sub board. 2. Students’: Text book, work book. III. Procedure : 1. Organization: (1’) 7A: ……/ 17 out: ………………. 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Asks Ss to practise in group of three, using “Nice to see you ", “Nice to meet you”. * Key: Ss work in groups: Ex: Tuan: Hello. Hung: Hi, Ba. Nice to see you again. Tuan: Nice to see you, too. Hung: This is our new classmate. Her name is Hoa. Tuan: Nice to meet you Hoa. Hoa: Nice to meet you ,too. 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (6’) * Wordsquare: T: Guides Ss to play game. S C H O O L D Ss: Play game. T T B I G H N U N C L E A E D U J I T P I E A S V N P R N E W E U Y F T N E R A P Q * Answers Aunt, friend.

(9) Student, happy, live School, big, uncle, new, old 3.2. Presentation: T: Gives Ss to see the picture and introduces to sum up situation of the passage. T: Gives the newwords. T: Gives situation: Hoa lives far from home, her parents and her friends. T: How does she feel? Ss: answer. T: Reviews the present simple. T: Present the way of using of “a lot of = many”. (8’). 3.3. Practice: (18’) T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the questions. Ss: work in pairs. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects mistakes and gives answer keys. Ss: Write down the answers.. + For weaker students: change “Hoa”. parent. * Newwords: - happy >< unhappy - miss : nhí - different >< same. * a lot of = many : nhiÒu Ex: I have a lot of money. We have many books. * Answer the questions:. *Key: a. She is from Hue. b. She is staying with her uncle and aunt. c. No. She doesn’t have any friends in Ha Noi. d. Her new school is bigger than her old school. e. She is unhappy because She misses her parents and her friends. * Transformation writing from the text (A2.P11).

(10) to “I” + For stronger students: change the information and change "Hoa” to “I”.. Ex: I am a student in class 7A. I am from Hueand my parents still live there. I live with……… Ex: I am a new student in …… I am from ……… and my parents …… I live with ……… in ……. Ss: write the passage. T: Corrects mistakes. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Asks Ss to read the reading and gives an exercise: T or F? 1. Hoa is from Hue. 2. She lives with her parents in Ha Noi. 3. She has a lot of friends in Ha Noi. 4. She misses her friends in Hue. 5. She is happy now. Ss: Give the answers. T: Corrects mistakes and gives key. * Key: 1. T 3. F 5. F 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises :1,2,4(P 3,4). - Prepare:Unit 1. Back to school- A-3-5).. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: …………………………………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………………………….. ……………………………………………………………………………………………... Teaching date: 7A: ……/08/2011. Period: 4. UNIT 1. BACK TO SCHOOL B1-3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:.

(11) 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask for and give the personal information. 2. Skill: pairwork, groupwork. To develop listening, speaking, writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love school and friends, study seriously. II. Preparation 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, cassette, tape. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure 1. Organization (1’) 7A:……/ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up(5’) *Requirement: Calls Ss to complete the dialogue. Lan: Hello, Mai………….........? Mai: ……….., Thank you. …….., Lan? Lan: …………,but I’m very busy. Mai: ……… *Key: Lan :…….How are you? Mai: I’m fine,thank you. How about you, Lan? Lan: Not bad, ………….. Mai: Me, too. 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions: + What’s your name? + How old are you? + What do you do? + Where do you live? Ss: Answer. 3.2. Presentation (10’) T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and .* Cue questions: asks some questions: +Who are they? Ss: Look at the picture and answer. +What are they talking? T: Plays the tape tiwce.(or read) Ss: Listen to the tape. T: Says: Ex: Ss: Listen. -My full name is Nguyen thi thuy..

(12) T: Asks: - What does “full name” mean? - What does “family name” mean? - What does”middle name” mean? 3.3.Practice: (15’) T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects the mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue, the questions and find the information to answer . Ss: Read the dialogue and find information to answer. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Give the answers. T: Corrects and gives key. T: Asks Ss to repeat Wh-questions. Ss: Repeat.. T: Asks Ss to fill the suitable Whquestions in the blankets in group of four. Ss: Work in group of four. T: Checks the answers Ss: Give the answers. T: Gives the key by sub-board. Ss: Compare the answers.. . 4. Consolidation: (7’) T: Asks Ss to complete the form:. 5’. -My middle name is Thi. -Myfamily name is Nguyen Ex: Nguyen Thi Thuy. Family name middle name 1.Practice the dialogue. Ask and answer about Hoa.. *Key: a, She is talking to Miss Lien. b, Her family name is Pham. c, Her middle name is Thi. d, She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street. 2. Complete the dialogue with Whquestions: * Wh-questions: Who, Where, How, What, Which.. * Key: Nga: Who………? Nga: ….Who………..? Nga: Which……………..? Nga: Where…………..? Nga: Where………………? Nga:………….How………..?.

(13) Name Age Grade School Home address T: Gives cue words: Nam – Nguyen – 15 Minh – Tran – 13 Ss: Work in pair. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise asking and answering about name, family name, middle name, full name. - Do exercise 3. - Prepare: Unit 1. Back to school – B. 4, 5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…/08/2011. Period: 5. UNIT 1. BACK TO SCHOOL B 4, 5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask and answer about distance with “ How far is it from….to….?”. -It’s about……metter(s)/ Kilometer(s). 2. Skill: pairwork. To develop listening, speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love school, like speaking about distance, study seriously. II. Preparation 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, cassette, tape. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure 1. Organization: (1’) 7A:……./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement:T: calls Ss to answer the questions.

(14) *Key:. + What’s your full name? + What’s your middle name? +What’s your family name? + My full name is ……….. + My middle name is ……. + My family name…………. .. 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up (5’) T: Ask Ss some questions: + Where do you live? + How do you go to school? Ss: Answer. 3.2. Presentation: (8’) T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and * Cue questions: asks some questions. + How does Hoa go to school? Ss: Look at the picture and answer. + How far is it from her house to T: Plays the tape tiwce.(or read) school? Ss: Listen and repeat to the tape. T: Presents newwords. *Newwords: Ss: Listen and write. -How far: Bao xa T: Guides Ss to practise newwords. - about: khoảng Ss: Practise the words. T: Presents structure. *Structure: Ss:Write down. + How far is it from…….to…….? T: Gives Ss to read the structure. It’s about …metter(s)/ kilometer(s). Ss: Read the structure. ( Use to say about the distance.) T: Asks some Ss the question. Ex:How far is it from Hoa’house to Ss: Answer. school? It’s about one kilometer. It’s about five hundered meters. 3.3.Practice: (19’) T: Asks Ss to practise the dialogue in 1. Practise the dialogue: pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise..

(15) T: Corrects the mistakes. T: Asks Ss to work in pair using the cues. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects Ss’ mistakes.. 2.Asks and answer about distance: + How far is it from your house to school? - It’s about………. *Cue cards: school The market The post office The movie theater 1km 300 m 700 m. .. 2km Ex: A: How far is it from your house to school? B: It’ s about one kilometer. C: How far is it from your house to sthe market? D: It’s about three hundred meters.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. Talk about the distance: “How far is it from… to…….? – It’s about……..meter(s)/ Kilometer(s). Ss: Work in pair. T: Corrects mistakes. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise asking and answering about distance again. - Do exercises: 3,4. - Prepare:Unit 2. Personal Information –A.1-3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(16) Teaching date: 7A:……./09/2011. Period: 6. UNIT1 BACK TO SCHOOL B 6, 7. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to listen about distance from this place to other place with “ How far is it from….to….?”. -It’s about……metter(s)/ Kilometer(s). 2. Skill: pairwork. To develop listening, writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love, friends, school, like speaking about personer information, study seriously. II. Preparation 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, cassette, tape. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure 1. Organization (1’) 7A:……./17 out:…………………. 2. Check up(5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions + What’s your name? + How do you go to school? + How far is it from your house to school? *Key: + My full is ……….. + I go to school by bike/ on foot. + It’s about …………………… . 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up (5’) T: Ask Ss some questions: + Where do you live? - I live in …………….. + How do you go to school? - I go to school by……… + How far is it from your house to - It’s about ……………………….. school? Ss: Answer. 3.2. Presentation: (8’).

(17) T: Draws a map on the board (use picrure in the book) and presents the content of the dialogue. Ss: Look at the picture. T: Gives Ss to get to know about some places on the pictures. Ss: Look at the picture and remark. T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Answer.. * Places: Lan’s house, school, post office, market, theater. * Cue questions: + Is Lan’s house near/ far from school? + Is Lan’s house near the market/ the post office/ the theater? * Newwords: - still: - to post: - at recess: - meter: - stamps: - letter: - center: - pocket: - take the bus: - kilometer - From school to Lan’s house: - From Lan’s house to the post office: - From Lan’s house to the movie theater: - From the movie theater t the post office:. T: Plays the tape once and presents newwords. Ss: Listen and write down.. T: Asks Ss to listen to four dialogues and find out the distances. Ss: Listen to the teacher.. T: Gives Ss to review the structure. Ss: Review the structure. 3.3.Practice: T: Plays the tape three times. Ss: Listen the dialogues and write the answers. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Plays the tape one more time. Ss: Listen and check.. * Structure: + How far is it from…….to…….? It’s about …metter(s)/ kilometer(s). (19’) 1. Listen distance:. and. write. the. four. * Key: Lan’s house 300m 700meters School Post office 3 kilometers. 2 km.

(18) T: Corrects and gives the key.. T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Answer.. T: Asks Ss to practice in pair, and fill information in the card. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls some Ss to read the card. Ss: Read aloud. T: Calls one or two ss to retell informationin the completed card. Ss: Say.. Market Theater *Key: a. School to Lan’s house: 300meters. b. Lan’s house to post office:700 meters. c. School to movie theater: 3 `kilometers. d. Movie theater to post office: 2 kilometers. 2. A survey: * Cue questions: + What’s your name? + Where do you live? + Where do you live? + How do you go to school? + How far is it from your house to school? Name: Address: Means of transport: Distance:. Ex: My friend’s name is……He/She lives at…../ on……He/ She goes to school by……It’s …….from…..to…. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. Listen comprehension the dialogues and write the distances, talk about information of classmates. Ss: Listen and say again. T: Corrects mistakes..

(19) 5. Home work: (2’) -Practise asking and answering about distance again. - Do exercises: 3,4. - Prepare:Unit 2. Personal Information –A.1-3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………. Teaching date: 7A: ……/09/2011. Period: 7. UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION A1-3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to retell the telephone numbers of oneself or others people in the family, listen and rewrite the telephone numbers of classmates. 2. Skill: pairwork workgroup. To develop listeningand speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love reading the telephone numbers, like speaking about personal information, study seriously. II. Preparation 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, cassette, tape, telephone directory. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure 1. Organization: (1’) 7A:……/17. out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement:T: calls Ss to ask and answer about the distance: from your house to post office/ market/ school. *Key: + How far is it from your house to post office/ market/ school? It’s about……………………meter(s)/ kilometer(s). . 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content.

(20) 3.1 Warm up T: Calls two teams to play game. (T: Reads the numbers and Ss slap the numbers on the board. Which team slap more numbers that team will win). Ss: Play game. 3.2. Presentation T: Presents newwords. Use the objects: telephone, telephone directory telephone number. Ss: Look at the objects and say. T: Guides Ss practise the new words. Ss: Practise the words. T: Guides Ss to read the telephone numbers.. (5’). six. five. ten three eight (8’). nin e. *Newwords: - telephone : điện thoại - telephone number : số điện thoại - telephone directory: danh bạ điện thoại * The way of reading the telephone numbers: + We have to stop after area numbers and after each 3 numbers the same as: Ex: 0273 833 159 + With numbers such as: 11, 33, 88,... We read “double” + number or numbers. Ex: 11 : double one or one one *Structure: + What’s your telephone niumber? 8 331 919. T: Presents structure: the way asking the telephone number Ss: Listen and write down. 3.Practice: T: Asks Ss to look at the telephone directory and read the telephone numbersof some people. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects the mistakes. T: Plays the tape three times . Ss: Listen and write the telephone numbers.. * Slap the board:. (18’) 1. Read the telephone numbers: a. S1: Dao Van An S2: seven -three four five- six one oh b. S3: Pham Viet Anh S4: eight- two six nine -five six oh …………………… 2. Listen and write the telephone numbers:.

(21) T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Plays the tape one more time. Ss: Listen and check the answers. T: Gives the key.. T: Plays the tape twice. Ss: Listen and repeat the dialogue. T: Asks Ss to practise in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects mistakes and asks Ss to make a new dialogue.. *Key: a. 8 251 654 d. 8 351 793 b. 8 250 514 e. 8 237 041 c. 8 521 936 f. 8 821 652 3. Listen. What’s your telephone numbers:. *Make a new dialogue: Thu: Excuse me, Trang. Trang: Yes, Lan. Thu: What’s your telephone number? Trang: 8 375 964. Thu: thanks. I’ll call you soon.. 4. Consolidation: (7’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. Read the telephone numbers, ask for and give the telephone numbers “What’s your telephone number?” T: Gives a game and dilivers each group the card. Name Address Telephone number Ss: Work in group of five. Hoa Luc Lieu, Thanh Phat 3 84 5 617 T: Checks each group. Hung Cay Nhoi,Thanh Phat 3 833 264 Ss: Practise before the class. Tuan Tan Thanh, TP T: Corrects mistakes. 8 833 165 thu 5. Home work: (1’) -Practise asking and answering about the telephone numbers again. Make a new dialogue. - Prepare:Unit 2. Personal Information –A. 4,5 * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy.

(22) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:….. /09/2011. Period: 8. UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION A 4,7. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk to on the phone , make arrangement, get to know using the future simple tense, review the way of invitationsomeone to do something and the answers. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop listening, reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love making arrangement, like talking about plans,intentions II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, cassette, tape. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A: ……./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: T: calls Ss to the telephone numbers: 8 321 748, 8 313 925 *Key: Ss: Read . . 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Jumble words: T: Calls Ss to arrange the words. Ss: Play game. +DENSTUT +OMIVE +OTRMWORO +PLYA * Key: + STUDENT + MOVIE + TOMORROW + PLAY.

(23) 3.2. Presentation: (10’) T: Says: Tam and Phong are talking on the phone. + What are they talking to? + Where will they go? T: Reads the dialogue once.(plays the tape) Ss: Listen to teacher. T: Presents structure:When we want to *Structure: invite someone things or to go some + Would you like to……(review) where we use structure: “would you Ex: Would you like to drink coffee? like to……?” Would you like to see a movie? T: Explains the use and the usage. + Simple future: will/shall +V - Usage: We use the simple future tense to speak to intends of some one. Ex:- Where will we meet? We’ll meet in front of the movie theater. -Will you be free tomorrow evening? Yes, I am. T: Presents the order sentences. + The order sentences: use to order Ss: Listen and write down. some one. Ex:- Don’t be late! -Don’t laugh! 3.Practice: (18’) 1. Read the dialogue and answer the T: Asks Ss to practise the dialogue. questions: Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects the mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read questions and finds information to answer. Ss: Read the questions and find the answers in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Give the answers. * Key: T: Corrects and gives the key. a. Phong and Tam..

(24) b. They will see a movie. c. they’ll meet at 6.45. d. they’ll meet in front of the movie theater. 2. Make the similar dialogue: T: Asks Ss to make a similar dialogue in part 4 in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Helps Ss to practise. Ss: Practise.. Ex: Hoa: Hello. This is 3 833 157. Lan: Hello. Is this Hoa. Hoa: Yes, Who is this? Lan: It’s me, Lan. Will you be free tomorrow afternoon? Hoa: Yes, I will. Lan: Would you like to go shopping? Hoa: Certainly. What time will you go? Lan: I’ll go at 2 o’clock. Let’s meet at 1.45. Hoa: Where will we meet? Lan: We’ll meet at my house. Hoa: Ok. I’ll see you tomorrow. 3. Play with words: Will you come to my party?. T: Reads the sentences once. Ss: Listen. T: Asks Ss to read the sentences in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls some Ss to read aloud. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson.” Would you like to……?”, Simple future “Will/ Shall + V”, The order sentences: “ Don’t….” ( Remember). Ss: Make the sentences. T: Corrects the mistakes. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise structures again..

(25) - Do exercises: 1,2,3/P.10,11. - Prepare: Unit 2. Personal Information –B.5,6. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:……/09/2011. Period: 9. UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION A 5, 6. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to listen comprehension and rewrite the main information in the dialogue. Ss read comprehension the dialogue and answer the questions. Review the way of calling and answering the phone. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop listening, reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love talking on the phone, like talking about plans, intentions II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, cassette, tape, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization : (1’) 7A: ……./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Say the invitations. *Key: + Would you like to play soccer? - Yes, I’d love to. . 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Calls Ss to read the numbers. * Telephone numbers: Ss: Read aloud. + 8 347 569 T: Gives the remarks. + 7 468 253 + 4 836 921.

(26) + 8 833 468 3.2. Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and presents content of the dialogue. Ss: Look and listen to teacher. T: Reads the dialogue once and presents structures. Ss: Listen and write down.. (8’). *Structure: + Can I speak to Lan? + Where should we meet? + How will you get there? * Vocabulary: - moment: - take a bus: - to tell: - at the moment - again: - to talk about:. T: Presents newwords. Ss: Listen and write down.. 3.Practice: T: Asks Ss to practise the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects the mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read questions and finds information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Give the answers. T: Corrects and gives the key.. T: Presents the content of the listening and guides Ss do exercise in group of four( use sub-board). Ss: Listen. T: Reads or plays the tape three times. Ss: Listen and fill the missing. (19’) 1. Read the dialogue and answer the questions:. * Key: a. Phong is calling. b. Han is answering the phone. c. They are talking about Lan. d. She’ll be back at about six o’clock. e. He will call her again after six. 2. Listen and complete the sentences:.

(27) information in blackets in group of four. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Reads one more time. Ss: Listen and check the answers. T: Corrects and gives the key.. *Key: a. Telephone number: b. They will see: c. They will meet at: d. They will go by:. 8 545 545 a movie. Lan’s house. bus. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson.” Listen and read comprehension the dialogues, review the way of asking and answering the phone. Ss: Listen and say again. T: Corrects the mistakes. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise reading the dialogue again. - Do exercises: 3 P.9. - Prepare:Unit 2. Personal Information - B.1 – 3 .. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Ngày...............tháng.............năm 2011. Kiểm tra giáo án .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(28) Teaching date: 7A: ….../09/2011. Period: 10. UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION B 1,2,3,9. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to speak and write the ordinal numbers, talk about the dates of month, the months of the year. Ask And answer about the date of birth. 2. Skill: To develop listening, speaking, and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love talking about the dates and months, like speaking to the birthday II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, cassette, tape. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……../ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Write the sentences with “future simple tense and would you like….?” *Key: - He will visit his grandfather next week. - Would you like to see a movie ? . 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives the numbers: 1 – 20 and asks * Numbers: 1 - 20 Ss to read the numbers. Ss: Read the numbers. T: Asks: +Are the dates of month different from the count numbers? Ss: Answer. 3.2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss to look at the table in the * Ordinal numbers: book. - first : 1st Ss: Look at the table. - second : 2nd T: Plays the tape once. - third : 3rd.

(29) Ss: Listen. T: Presents the way of writing and reading the ordinal numbers.. T: Plays the tape twice.( or T. reads) Ss: Listen and repeat . T: Calls Ss to read the ordinal numbers before the class. Ss: Read aloud. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Corrects mistakes. 3.3 Practice: (17’) T: Hangs the sub-board with the dates of July. Ss: Look at the sub-board. T: Plays the tape and asks Ss to listen and write the dates. Ss: Listen and write the dates. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Plays the tape one more time and gives key. Ss: Listen and check with the teacher... T: Reviews the months of the year. Ss: Repeat. T: Asks Ss to write the months in order. Ss: Write the months in order. T: Calls Ss to write the months in order on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects and gives the key.. - fourth : 4th - fifth : 5th - sixth : 6th …………… - twelfth :12th. * Structure: + What is your date of birth? - June first( the first of june). 1. Listen and write the dates of july:. * Key: - the first of july. - the nineteenth. - the sixth. - the fourteenth. - the seventh. - the thirty – first. 2. Write the month in order from first to twelfth:. * Key:.

(30) T: Calls Ss to read name of the months. Ss: Read aloud. T: Corrects mistakes. T: Reads the sentences once. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Answer.. 1. January 7.July 2. February 8. August 3. Match 9. September 4. April 10. October 5. May 11. November 6. June 12. December 3. Play with words: + Which months have thirty days? + Which months have thirty-one days? + Which month has twenty-eight?. T: Calls Ss to read the sentences. Ss: Read aloud. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Listen and write the dates of the month, the months of the year”. Ss: Say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise the dates again. - Do exercises: 1, 2/ P.10. - Prepare:B 4,5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…../09/2011. Period: 11. UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION B 4, 5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask and answer about personal information, Talk about the plan in the future with simple future. Read comprehension the dialogue and answer the questions, write the student card. 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop speaking and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love talking about personal information, the birthday, study seriously..

(31) II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, cassette, tape, sub - board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A: ……/17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Read the dates of the month, the months of the year. *Key: - first, second, third, fourth, fifth,……thirtieth. - January, February, Match, April,……December. 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Hangs the sub–board, and calendar Jannuary …………….. with dates of month, months of the February …………….. year. Match November Ss: Look at the sub-board and April December calendar. ……………. T: Calls Ss to read the dates and the months. Ss: Read aloud. T: Feedbacks. 3.2 Presentation: (10’) T: asks the questions. * Cue question: + Who are they? + What will Mr. Tan ask Hoa? + What are they doing? T: Presents the stuation of the dialogue. Hoa comes and writes name in group of teacher ,Tan. Ss: Look at the book and answer the question. T: Plays the tape once. Ss: Listen. T: Presents vocabulary. * Vocabulary: Ss: Listen and write down. - nervous (adj): sợ hãi T: Guides Ss to pratise the words. - worry (V) : lo lắng - Happy (adj) : vui vẻ, hạnh phúc.

(32) - On (pre) : * Structure: + Preposition: On use to dates Ex: On birthday On Friday On July + The simple future tense. Use to talk about planing in the future. Ex: I shall go to Ha Noi tomorrow. She will have a party on Friday.. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. Ss: Review. 3.3 Practice: (17’) T: Asks Ss to peactise the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Cheks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives key.. T: Uses the cards with form. Asks Ss to read the dialogue and complete the form in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Gives answer by bub- board. Ss: Compare and correct mistakes. 1. Practice the dialogue. Then answer the questions:. * Key: a. Hoa is 13 years old. b. She will be 14 on her next birthday. c. Her birthday is june eighth. d. Hoa lives with her uncle and aunt. e. Hoa is worried because she doesn’t have any friends. F, g, h. Students’ answers. 2. Complete the form about Hoa:. 6’. * Key: Student Registration Form Name: Pham Thi Hoa Date of birth: June eighth.

(33) Address: 12 Tran Hung Dao street Telephone number: 8 262 019 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Talk about personal information, date of birth” Ss: Say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise the dialogue again. - Do exercises: 3/P.11. - Prepare: B 6. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 12 7A:…./09/2011 UNIT 2: PERSONAL INFORMATION. B. 6 - 8 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the paragraph and complete the invitation card to Lan’s party, get to know to write an invitation to the birthday party. 2. Skill: Groupwork. To develop reading, writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love talking a birthday party, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, sub - board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……/ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: T: Asks some questions about Hoa: + What’s her full name? + How old is she?.

(34) + How old will she be on her next birthday? + What’s her date of birth? + Who does she live with? + How old are you? + How old will you be on your next birthday? *Key: + Her full name is Pham Thi Hoa. + She is thirteen years old. + She will be 14 years old on her next birthday. + It’s june eighth + She lives with her uncle and aunt. + I’m ……years old.+ I will be …….years old on my next birthday. 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Lucky numbers: T: Gives a game and guides Ss to play. 1 2 3 4 5 T. Gives the questions about Hoa. 6 7 8 9 10 Ss: Play game. * Questions: 1.What’s Hoa’s full name? 2. Where does she come from? 3. Lucky number. 4. Where does she live? 6. How old is she? 7. Who does she live with? 8. Lucky number. 9. How far is it from Hoa’s house to school? 10. Lucky number. 3.2 Presentation: (8’) T:Asks Ss to look at the picture and presents the text. Ss: Look at the picture and listen to the teacher. T: Reads the paragraph once. Ss: Listen . T: Presents vocabulary. *Vocabulary: Ss: Listen and write down. - to have a party: tổ chức 1 bữa tiệc T: Guides Ss to practise the words. - to invite (v): mời.

(35) Ss: Practise. Ss: Answer the questions. T: Presents the invitation card form.. - An invitation card (n): thiếp mời - to hope : hi vọng * the invitation card form: Dear…., I am having a birthday party on……... The party will be at….from…..to…… I hope you will come and join the fun. Love,……. Tel:………... 3.3 Practice: (19’) T: Calls Ss to read the text . 1. Read the text and complete the Ss: Read aloud. invitation card: T: Dilivers Ss the cards and asks Ss to 5’ read the text then complete the invitation card in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Gives the key(use the sub –board). * Key: Ss: Exchange the cards and compare Dear Huong, the answer. I am having a birthday party on T: Gives the remarks. Sunday, May 25th. Ss: Write down the note book. The birthday party will be at my house at 24 Ly Thuong Kiet Street from five to nine. I hope you will come and join the fun. Love, Tel: 8 647 758 Lan. T: Explains the requirement of the 2. Answer the questions. Imagine exercise: Imagine you are a guest at you will be a guest at Lan’s Lan’s birthday party and what will you birthday party: What will you do? do? Ss: Listen and answer the questions. T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects mistakes and gives key. * Key: Ss: Write the answers down the note a. I will give Lan a pen( a book, some book. flowers, ……).

(36) T: Asks Ss to write the an invitation card to your birthday party. Ss: Write the invitation card. T: Calls one Ss to write on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects mistakes and gives the cue an invitation.. b. I will get to her home by bike/ on foot. c. I will play card/ blind man’s bluff/ catch/……. d. I will eat candies, cakes, melon, mangoes, ……… e. I will drink water, coca cola, orange juice,……… f. I will leave at nine o’clock. 2. Wrire an invitation to your birthday party.. * Cue an invitation: Dear Tuan, I am having a birthday party on Sunday, Oc tober 2nd.. The party will be at my house at Luc Lieu, Thanh Phat from six to nine. I hope you will come and join the fun. Love, Hung.. Tel: 3 833 160. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “ Read the text about Lan and complete the invitation card”. Ss: Read again the completed invitation card.. 5. Home work: (2’) - Read and translate the text in to Vietnamese. - Do exercises: 4. - Prepare: Unit 3. At Home – A.1. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy.

(37) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Ngày……tháng………năm 2011. Kiểm tra giáo án. ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:…./09/2011. Period: 13. UNIT 3: AT HOME A. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about the name of objects in the house, get to know the exclamations. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop listening, speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love houses, rooms, the objects in the rooms, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book.pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……../ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: T: Asks some questions about your birthday party: + Will you have a party to your birthday? + Who will you invite? + When will you have a birthday party?.

(38) *Key:. + Where will you have a party? + What time will The party start/ finish? + Yes, I will. + I will invite my friends. + It’s…………... + I will have a birthday party at……. + It starts at five o’clock in the evening and finish at nine... 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Networds: T: Gives a topic “a house” + How many rooms are there in your phßng kh¸ch house? A Ss: Say. house Phßng ngñ Phßng t¾m 3.2 Presentation: (11’) T: Presents content of the dialogue and reads the dialogue once. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Uses the picture to present * Vocabulary: vocabulary. Ss: Look at the picture and write down. T: Guides Ss to read the words. kitchen Ss: Practise.. a house. bathroom. bedroo m Livin g. - bathroom: a sink, ashower. - kitchen: Washing machine, dryer,.

(39) refrigerator, dish washer, electric stove. - bedroom: comfortable, convenient, a mazing, modern. * Structure: Exclamation: + What an awful day! + What a lovely livingroom! * Note: AmE BE - favorite - favourite - color - colour. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Presents the way of writing the words.. 3.3 Practice: T: Reads the dialogue one more time. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to practise asking and answering the questions. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Gives the answer. T: Corrects and gives the key. Ss: Write the answers down the notebook.. (16’). * Key: a. The living-room, Hoa’s (bed) room, the bathroom, and the kitchen. b. Because it is bright and it has nice colors: pink and white. c. A sink, a tub, and a shower. d. A washing machine, a dryer, a refregerator, a dish washer, and electric stove. e. and f. students’ answer.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “ Talk about the room in the house ” and asks some questions: 1. How many rooms are there in the house?.

(40) 2. What are there in the living-room? 3. What are there in the kitchen? Ss: Listen and answer. 5. Home work: (2’) - Describe the house again. - Do exercises: 1. - Prepare:Unit 3: At Home: A.2, 3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 14 7A:…./09/2011 UNIT 3: AT HOME. A. 2 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to make a complaint, and give a complement about one thing. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop writing, speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love houses, rooms, the objects in the rooms, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Describe the house and write the objects in the bathroom, bedroom, kitchen. *Key: - bathroom: a sink, a shower. - kitchen: Washing machine, dryer, refrigerator, dish washer, electric stove. - bedroom: comfortable, convenient, a mazing, modern… 3. Newlesson:.

(41) Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Slap the board: T: Gives a topic “a house” + How many rooms are there in your movie house? Ss: Say.. party. room dinner. house yard. 2 Presentation: T: Presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise the words. T: Presents the structures.. (10’) * Vocabulary: - expensive(adj) - bad(adj) - awful(adj) - great(adj) - wet(adj) - bright(adj) - boring(adj) - dilicious(adj) * Structures: + Exclamation: 2 kinds: Complaints, compliments - Form: What + a/an + adj + noun! + Complements: Ex: What a beautiful bathroom! What an interligent boy! + Complaints: Ex: What an awful day! What a dirty classroom!. 3.3 Practice: (17’) T: Calls Ss to say the exclamations. 1. Write the exclamations: Ss: Say the sentences.Using the phrases. T: Asks Ss to write the sentences and calls Ss to write the sentences on the board. Ss: Write the sentences.. T: Corrects mistakes and gives key. * Key:.

(42) a, Complaints: + What an awful restaurant! + What a wet day! + What a boring party! + What a bad movie! b, Complements: + What a bright room! + What an interesting movies! + What a lovely house! + What a dilicious dinner! + What a beautiful day! 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Write the exclamations, describe the objects in the room”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Write the exclamations. - Do exercises: 2, 3, 4. - Prepare: Unit 3: At Home - B 1. 2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:……/09/2011. Period: 15. UNIT 3: AT HOME B. 1,2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask and answer about jobs: a farmer, a teacher, a nurse… and places of work. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love jobs, members in the family. II. Preparation:.

(43) 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, tape, cassette. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……/ 17. out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: T: Calls Ss to present the objects in the classroom, and ask and answer about position. *Key: - There is a board on the wall. - There are four windows in our class. A: There is a vase of flowers. B: Where it it? A: It is in next to the window. 3.Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic “jobs” * Networds: Ss: Say. teacher nurse jobs 2 Presentation: T: Presents picture and read the dialogue once. Ss: Look at the picture and listen to the teacher T: Presents new words( the job): I am a teacher. I work at school. Ss: Listen and write. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise the words. T: Presents the structures. Ask and answer about jobs.. doctor. (10’). *Vocabulary: - farmer (n) - raise (v) - newspaper (n) - sick (adj) - to raise cattle (n). - journalist (n) - work (v) - to take care of - grow(v). * Structures: + What does(your father/mother) do ? - He/She is a (an) ………. + Where does he/she work?.

(44) - He/She works ……….. Ex: A: What does your father do? B: He is a farmer. A: Where does he work? B: He works on the farm. 3.3 Practice: T: Plays the tape (or read the dialogue) Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Asks Ss to work in pair and checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue to find information to answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects mistakes and gives key.. T: Calls Ss to read the paragraph. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to work in pair: Talk about Lan’s family. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects mistakes. T: Asks one student. Ss: Answer.. (18’) 1. Practice reading the dialogue and answer the questions:. * Key: a. he’s a farmer. b. He works on his farm. c. She is a housework. d. She does the housework and she helps on the farm. e. Yes, They are. Because They love working on their farm. f. She is eight. 2. Read the paragraph and answer the questions. a. Talk about Lan’s family: Ex: S1: What does her father do? S2: He is a doctor. S1: Where does he work? S2: He work in a hospital. …………………………… b. Talk about your family: Ex: T: Where does your father do?.

(45) S1: He works on our farm. T: What does he do? S1: He is a farmer. T: Asks Ss to practise about your family. Ss: Work in pair about the family. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects mistakes.. Ex: S1: Where does your mother do? S2: She work in a fatory. S1: What does she do? S2: She is a farmer.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Ask and answer about jobs, talk about Hoa’s family”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Practise speaking about job of members in the family. - Prepare:Unit 3: At Home: B 2, 3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:……./09/2011. Period: 16. UNIT 3: AT HOME B. 3, 4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to Talk about someone’s job and wrork, listen and fill the information about someone’s job in the forms. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love jobs, members in the family. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, cassette, tape..

(46) 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions: + What does your father/mother/brother/sister do? + Where does he/she work? *Key: - He/She is a…………….. - He/She work on……………… 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions: * Match the half-sentences:(P.35) + What’s your father do? + What does he do? + What does a doctor/ a journalist/ a teacher/ do? Ss: Answer. T: Asks Ss to match the half-sentences use sub-board). Ss: Match. T: Corrects and gives key. * Key: - A farmer work on a farm. - A doctor takes care of sick people. - A journalist writes for a newspaper. - A teacher teaches in a school. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Presents content of the paragraph: Listen about Tom, Susan and Bill then complete the information in the forms. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Plays the tape(or read the para) *Vocabulary: once and pressents newwords. - high school(n) : trường cấp 2 Ss: Listen and write down. - magazine(n) : tạp chí - Tom(n).

(47) T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. - Bill(n) - Susan(n) * Structures: + Present simple: Ex: He is a teacher. He is 30 years old. He works in a school. 3.3 Practice: (19’) 1. Listen and complete these forms T: Divides class into four groups(each for three people on the tape: group of six people) and delivers Ss the cards. Ss: Listen. T: Plays the tape and asks Ss to listen 7’ and complete the form in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. * Key: T: Gives the key and asks Ss to 1. Name: Tom exchange the cards to check. Age : 26 Ss: Compare the answers. Job : teacher Place of work: at a high school 2. Name: Susan Age : 19 Job : journalist Place of work: for a magezine 3. Name: Bill Age : 20 Job : nurse Place of work: in a hospital 2. Rewrite the sentences about Tom, T: Asks Ss to rewrite the sentences Susan and Bill: * Cue writing: about Tom, Susan, and Bill use sub1. His name is ……..He is ………….. board). He ……He teaches……… Ss: Write. 2. Her name is ……….She is ………. She is …………She…….. 3. Bill is………. He is …. He ……in a…………… T: Calls Ss to complete the sentences. * Key: Ss: Write on the board. 1. His name is Tom. He is 26 years T: Corrects and give key..

(48) old. He works in a school. He teaches at a high school. 2. Her name is Susan. She is 19 years old. She is a journalist. She writes for a magazine. 3. Bill is 20 years old. He is a nurse. He works in a hospital. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “ talk about jobs and work, listen and complete the forms”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise speaking about job of members in the family and the jobs. - Do exercises: 1/15 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 3: At Home: B 5, 6. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A: ……/10/2011. Period: 17. UNIT 3: AT HOME B. 5,6. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask and answer information about a partner, write a letter. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop writing and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love houses, the family. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, cassette, tape. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……. out:…………………..

(49) 2. Check up: (15’) Test: 15’ *Requirement: Exercise 1: Choose the best answer: (5 marks) 1. There ……(is/are/am/being) some students in the picture. 2. What……..(am/a/one/an) awful day! 3. There …….(to be /is/am/are) a book on the table. 4. What ……..(one/a/an/in) beautiful girl! 5. What………(does/do/did/done) your father do? Exercise 2: Write five sentences use There is…../There are…. (5 marks) *Key: Exercise 1: 1. are 2. an 3. is 4. a 5.does Exercise 2: There is a board on the wall. There are some books on the table. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (4’) * Make the sentences with T: Gives some information: comparative and superlative. + Nam : 1m35 + Ha Noi : 30oC Ss: Say and write. Ba : 1m45 HCM City: 35oC Tam : 1m60 Hue : 38oC - Ba is taller than Nam. - Tam is taller than Ba. - Tam is the tallest. ………………… 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Presents content of the dialogue and plays the tape. Ss: Listen to the tape. T: Presents vocabulary. * Vocabulary: - apartment(A.E) = flat (B.E) Ss: Listen and write. - easy(adj) >< difficult(adj) T: Guides Ss to practise the words. - empty(adj) >< full(adj) Ss: Practise the words. - newest(adj) - cheap(adj) >< expensive(adj) - furnish (v) - suitable(adj).

(50) T: Presents the structures: Ask and answer about jobs.. 3.3 Practice: T: Reads the dialogue. Ss: Listen to the teacher.. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair and checks some pairs Ss: Practise. T: Asks Ss to answer the questions. Ss: work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Gives the answers T: Corrects and gives the key.. * Structures: + Comparative: - short adjective: adj + er (+ than) Ex: - This room is big. That room is bigger. -The house is cheaper. - Hoa is taller than Lan. - Long adjective: more + adj + than Ex: more difficult More beutiful Ex:- The dress is expensive. That dress is more expensive. - Mai is more inteligent than Huong. + Superlative: - Short adjective: the + adj + est Ex: The book is the cheapest. This house is the biggest. - Long adjective: the + most + adj Ex: - The arpartment is the most expensive. -Long Bien is the most beautiful bridge. (12’) 1. Read the dialogue and answer the questions.. * Key: a. The one at number 27. b. the one at number 79. c. The one at number 79..

(51) T: Explains the requirement of the exercise. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Gives Ss to read the letter and fill adjs in the blankets. Ss: Complete the letter. T: Gives the answers by sub-board. Ss: Compare the answers and correct.. d. The one at number 27. 2. Complete Jonh’s letter to his wife and daughter in the USA using the words(If any).. * Key: August 16th Dear Sally and Liz, I have some good news for you. I found a place for us to live in Ha Noi.There are some beautifull apartments here some are cheap but a lot are expensive Luckyly the nicest apartment is also the cheapest It has great bedroom. The living room is rather small, but the ketchen is big so we will eat our meals there. I think this is the best apartment for us because it is near the city center. I will write again soon with more news. I hope you’re both well. Love, Jonh. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about the apartments and the way of using of comparative and superlative”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Write sentences using comparative and superlative. - Do exercises: 2, 3, 4/16-17 in workbook. - Prepare: Language forcus 1 * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(52) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Ngày………..tháng………..năm 2011. Kiểm tra giáo án …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… Period: 18 Teaching date: 7A:…../10/2011. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review grammar tense, structures, vocabulary.Using grammar tense and structure fluently to do exercises. 2. Skill: To develop writing and speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love do exercises, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization: (1’) 7A:……/ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (3’) *Requirement: Write sentences with comparative and superlative. * Key: Lan is taller than Hoa. Nguyet is the tallest in our class. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (4’).

(53) T: Gives an exercise: Ss: Complete the sentences. T: Corrects mistakes.. 3.2 Activity 1: T: Asks Ss to repeat the form and the way of using of present simple tense. Ss: Repeat. T: Asks Ss to put the correct form of verbs in the blankets. Ss: Complete the passage. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives the key.. (5’). 3.3 Activity 2. T: Asks Ss to repeat the form and examples. Ss: Repeat. T: Guides Ss to do exercise and calls Ss to write the sentences: Nam will do/ will not do tomorrow. Ss: Write the sentences. T: Corrects and gives the key.. (4’). 3. 4 Activity 3. T: Asks Ss to write the ordinal numbers. Ss: Write the numbers.. (4’). * Complete the sentences. 1. She……a student. 2. He…….go to Ho Chi Minh City next summer. 3. Is there a book? – Yes, there ….. 4…….there any pens?- Yes, there are. * Key: 1. is 2. is 3. is 4.Are Exercise 1: Present simple tense: Form: S + V- s,-es Ex: Everyday I go to school early. She lives in Hue.. * Key: a. .. is….lives…..are…..goes….. b. …are…eat…..rides…catches….. Exercise 2: Future simple tense. Form: S + will/shall + V Ex: She will go to Ha Noi tomorrow.. * Key: 1. He will do his homework, but he won’t tidy the yard. 2. He will see a movie, but he won’t watch T.V. 3. He will write to his grandmother, but he won’t meet Minh. Exercise 3: Ordinal numbers: First, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh..

(54) T: Corrects. 3.5 Activity 4: T: Asks Ss to write the sentences using the words in the box. Ss: Write the sentences. T: Calls Ss to write the sentences on the board. Ss: Write the sentences. T: Corrects the sentences and gives the key.. 3.6 Activity 5: T: Asks Ss to repeat the use of compalative and superlative. Ss: Repeat.. T: Guides Ss do the exercise. Ss: Write the dialogue in pair. T: Calls some pairs. Ss: Practise. 3.7 Activity 6: T: Asks Ss to repeat the way of asking the job. Ss: Repeat. T: Asks Ss to read the sentences and. (4’). (5’). (3’). Exercise 4: Preposition:. * Key: a. It’s under the table. b. It’s in front of the chair. c. It’s bihind the T.V. d. IT’s next to the bookcase. e. It’s on the couch. Exercise 5: Adjectives: * Compalative: + Short adj: adj + er + than Ex: small – smaller Tall – taller + Long adj: more + adj + than Ex: beautiful – more beautiful Inteligent – more inteligent Ex: Hoa is more beautiful than Lan. * Superlative: + Short adj: The + adj + est. Ex: tall – the tallest + Long adj: The most + adj. Ex: beautiful – the most beautiful Ex: Lan: A is a expensive dress. Hoa: And B is more expensive. Lan: But C is the most expensive. Exercise 6: Occupations: + What is your/his/her job? - I am a……. - He/ She is a/an…………. a. He is a fireman..

(55) writes the jobs. Ss: Read and write.. 3.8 Activity 7: T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and complete the sentences Ss: Look at the picture and complete the sentences.. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Gives the answers T: Corrects and gives the key.. (4’). 3.9 Activity 8: T: Asks Ss to look at the card and write the questions and the answers Ss: Write the questions and answers. T: Calls Ss to write the sentences on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects and gives the key.. (4’). b. She is a doctor. c. She is a teacher. d. He is a farmer. Exercise 7: Is there a…..?/Are there any…?. * Key: a. Are there any books? Yes, there are. b. Are there any armchairs? No, there aren’t. c. Is there a telephone? No, there isn’t. d. Are there any flowers? Yes, there are. Exercise 8: Question words:. * Key: + What is his name? - His name is Phan Trung Hung. + How old is he? He is twenty five. + What is his address? - His address is 34 Nguyen Bieu Street. + What is his job?/What does he do? He is an office Manager.. 4. Consolidation: (3’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Review the grammar from unit 1 to unit 3”.

(56) Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Do exercises: in workbook( from unit 1-unit 3). - Prepare: Do the first written test. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:……/10/2011. Period: 19. THE FIRST WRITTEN TEST. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Checking the students’ knowledge, vocabulary and grammar from Unit1 to Unit 3. Ss apply the knowledge learned to do the test. + Vocabulary and grammar: Present simple, near future, compalative, superlative, exclamation. + Listening: Telephone numbers. + Reading: Hoa’s family. + Writing: Write an invitation card. 2. Skill: Develop listening, reading and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love learning English, do the test seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Questionaire, papers. 2. Students’: Papers, pens. III. Procedure: 1. Organization: (1’) 7A:……/17 out:………. 2. Test: (31’) A. Matrix:. Level. Realize. Grasp throughly. Apply Low. Total High.

(57) Standard Listening (Unit: 2). - Listen to the telephone numbers. - Indefinite quantifiers. - Prepositions of position. Vocabulary - Distance. and grammar - greetings. (Unit:1,2,3) Sen: 4 Point: 1. Reading (Unit: 3). Writing (Unit:1). Sen: 5 Point: 2,5 Percent:25 %. Sen...: 5 Point: 2,5 - present simple. - Simple future - compalative. - Superlative. - exclaimation. - There is/ There are... Sen: 8 Point: 2pts Percent:20 %. Sen: 4 Point: 1 - Read the passage about Hoa’s family. Sen: 6 Point: 3 Percent: 30%. Sen: 6 Point: 3 - simple future - exclaimation - superlative. - distance. - Greeting. Sen...: 5 Point: 2,5. Total. Sen: 9 Sen: 10 Sen: 5 Point: 3,5 Point: 4 Point: 2,5 Percent: 35 % Percent: 40 % Percent: 25%. Sen:5 Point: 2,5 Percent:25 % Total Sen: 24 Point: 10 Percent: 100%. B. Questions: Question I. Listen and tick (v) the telephone numbers you hear.(2 marks) a. 8. 833 372. b. 8. 262 116 c. 4. 636 159. d. 8. 832 487 8 . 161 116. 8. 161 116 4. 626 159 8. 832 387 Question II. Read the paragraph and do the tasks follows(3 marks):.

(58) There are four people in Hoa’s family. Her father is a farmer. He works on his farm. Her mother is a teacher. She teaches in Doi Can school. Her younger sister is a student. She is ten years old. And Hoa is a student, too. * Match these half-sentences. A Answers B 1. There are 1…………… a. is a teacher. 2. Hoa 2……………. b. works on his farm. 3. Her mother 3…………… c. is a student, too. 4. Her father 4………….. d. four people in Hoa’s family. * Answer the questions: 1. How many people are there in Hoa’s family? 2. What does Hoa do? Question III. Choose the best answer (A,B,C or D) to complete these sentences (2,5 marks): 1.Hoa doesn’t have……friends in Ha Noi.. A. many B. lots of C. any D. a lot of 2. Nice to …… you again. A. see B. meet C. look D.like 3. My sister…….go to Ha Noi tomorrow. A. be going to B. will C. are going to D. is going to 4. What a…………gilr! A. beautiful B. beautifully C. beautifulness D. beauty 5. The dog is…….table. A. for B. in C. under D. at 6. Winter is …………..than summer. A. hotter B. cold C. hot D. colder 7. How …………. is it from your house to school? A.long B. tall C. far D. old 8. My dress is ………than Lan’s. A. expensive B. more expensive C. most expensive D. expensivest 9. What ……..your telephone number? A. is B. are C. does D. do 10. A journalist………..for a newspaper. A. write B. wrote C. writes D. written Question IV. Rearrange the words into the meaning sentences: 2,5 marks. 1. meet/ to/nice/you. 2. How/is/from/far/your house/to/the/market/it?/ 3. lovely/a/what/bedroom!/ 4. She/go/Ha Noi/to/ tomorrow/ will..

(59) 5. Lan/ beautiful/ the/ most/ my/ is/ in/ class/ C. Answers: Question I: a. 8. 833 272 b. 8. 262 116 c. 4. 626 159 d. 8. 832 478 Question II: * Matching : 1. – d; 2. – c; 3. – a; 4. – f; 5. – b; 6. – e. * Answer the questions: 1. There are four people in Hoa’s family. 2. She is a student. Question III: 1.C 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. C 6. D 7. C 8. B 9. D 10. C Question IV: 1. Nice to meet you. 2.How far is it from your house to the market? 3.What a lovely bedroom! 4. She will go to Ha Noi tomorrow. 5.Lan is the most beautiful in my class. D. Marks: Question I : 2 marks( 0,5 x 4) Question II : 3 marks( 0,5 x 6) Question III : 2,5 marks (0,25 x 10) Questin IV : 2,5 marks( 0,5 x 5) 3. Consolidation: (3’) T: Hands in the papers -Remarks the test. 4. Homework: (1’) - Prepare : Unit 4. At School – A1,2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: ……………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………….. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 20 7A:…./10/ 2011 UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL.

(60) A. 1,2,3 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask and answer about the time, timetable and talk about the schedules, subjects. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop listening and speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love the clocks, like talking the time. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, plastic clock. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……./17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: - No check the old leson( The last period did the written test) 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Draw clocks( use the plastic clock) . . Ss: Say the time.. It’s nine o’clock - It’s half past nine.. - It’s fifteen past ten. - It’s a quarter past ten. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to repeat the way of asking about time. Ss: Repeat. T: Presents the way of talking the time. Ss: Listen and write down.. T: Presents the timetable.. (10’) * The way of asking the time: + What time is it? – It’s…………. + What’s the time? – It’s…………. * The way of talking the time: + Giờ đúng: use “o’clock” Ex: It’s ten o’clock. + Giờ hơn: use “past”. Ex: It’s ten past eight. + Giờ kém: use “to”. Ex: It’s ten past ten..

(61) Ss: Listen and give subjects. T: Guides Ss to read the words. Ss: Practice.. 3.3 Practice: T: Plays the tape(or read the time). Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Calls Ss to read the time. Ss: Practise reading. T: Asks Ss to practice saying the time in pair. Ss: work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects mistakes(if any). T: Presents the questions. Ss: Listen and write down.. T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects and gives the key.. T: Reads the passage twice. Asks Ss to listens and complete the schedule in group of six.. * Subjects: - Geography: - Physic: - Physical Education – Fine Arts: - Biology : - Class meeting: - Chemical: - Technology: - Civic Education: - Vietnamese language and literature: (22’) 1. Practise saying the time:. Ex: A: What time is it? B: It’s seven o’clock.. 2. Answer about you: + What time do you get up/ go to bed? - I get up at six o’clock. - I go to bed at ten o’clock. + What time does Hoa get up? - She gets up at half past five.. * Key: a. I get up at (six) o’clock. b. The classes start at 7.30. c. They finish at a quarter to twelve.. d. I have lunch at 12.30. e. I go to bed at 10 o’clock. 3. Listen and write. Complete the schedule:.

(62) Ss: Listen and complete the schedule in group of six. T: Checks the answers Ss: Read the answers. T: Reads the passage one more time and gives the key. Ss: Listen and check.. * Key: 7.00. Friday 7.50 8.40. English Geography Music. 1.00 Physical. 9.40. Physics History. Saturday 2.40 3.40 Math. 10.30. English. 4.30 Physics. Education. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about time an dschedules”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise saying the time again. - Do exercises: 2, 3, 4/ in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 4: AT SCHOOL : A 3-5 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./10/ 2010. Period: 21. UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL A. 4, 5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask and answer about the schedule, the subjects at school and time, favorite subjects. Review the present continuous. 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop listening, speaking and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the time, subjects.Llike talking the time table and the subjects. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book..

(63) 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 14 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer about the time.(T. uses the plastic clock) *Key: - It’s seven o’clock. - It’s a quarter past/ to…….. - It’s ……to/ past…………. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Networds: T: Gives a topic “Subjects”. Maths History subject Ss: Say and write. Music 3. 2 Presentation: T: Presents the structures. Gives some (8’) * Structures: examples: + Present progressive: Ss: Listen and write down. Ex: I am writing. She is watching TV. We are studying English. T: Presents form. Form: I am Ss: Listen and write. He/She is + V They/we/you are (?)What is he/she studying? are they/you/we 3.3 Practice: (20’) T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and 1. Look at the pictures. Ask and guides Ss to do the exercise in pair. answer questions: Ss: Work in pair. Ex: S1: What is Binh studying? T: Corrects mistakes. S2: He is studying geography. S1: What time does Binh have his geography class? S2: He has his geography class at 10.10. 2. Read the dialogue:.

(64) T: Asks: What subjects do you have today? Ss: Answer. T: Presents content of the dialogue: We will listen to the dialogue between Hoa and Thu about schedule in week. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Gives the questions and plays the tape. Ss: Listen . T: Calls some pairs to read the dialogue. Ss: Practise. T: Asks Ss to write the schedule. Requires Ss to ask and answer about schedule. Ss: Write and practise.. * Cue questions: + What subjects do Thu and Hoa study? + What day do Thu and Hoa have that subject? Ex: + Which subjects do you have/study on Monday? + When do you have English/Math/ History? + What’s your favorite subject?. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about the schedule” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Write sentences using present progressive.. - Do exercises: 3, 4/22 – 23/ in workbook. - Prepare: A 6,7. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 22 7A:…./ 10/ 2011 UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL. A. 6, 7 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:.

(65) 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to Know some information about school in the U.S.A and know the diference between school in U.S.A and school in Viet Nam. 2. Skill: Groupwork. To develop reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love schools. Like talking about activities in the school, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, cards, sub board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions. + Which subjects do you have/study on Monday? + When do you have English/Math/Vietnamese language and literature? + What are we studying now? *Key: - I have school meeting, Math, English, technology. - I have Math on Monday, Tuesday, Thusday, and Friday. - We are studying English. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Networds: T: Gives a topic “Sports”. Soccer History sport Ss: Say and write. Volleyball Table tennis 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Presents the vocabulary. * Vocabulary: Ss: Listen and write down. - different from: - base ball: T: Guides Ss to practise the words. - break - basket ball: Ss: Practise the words. - cafeteria : - snack: - activity: T: Asks Ss to guess the information. * Cue questions Ss: Listen and answer. + What is the different from between schools in the U.S.A with school in Viet Nam? - Schools in the U.S.A: + wear uniform.

(66) + no lesson on saturday + have a cafeteria. 3.3 Practice: T: Calls Ss to read the text. Ss: Read the text aloud and compare with guessing information above. T: Divides class into 4 groups of six and dilivers the card for groups. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives the key.(use sub board). Ss: Corrects and write down.. (19’). 7’. * Key: a. T b. F. There are no lesson on saturday. c. F. One break is in the morning, the other is in the afternoon. d. T. e. F. ( The school cafeteria is open at lunch time and also at break). f.. F. Basketball is one of the most popular after school activities.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about the difference between schools in the U.S.A with the schools in Viet Nam”. And Asks some questions about the text. + What is the difference between school in the U.S.a with school in Viet Nam? + What time do classes start? + What time do they finish? + What are the most popular after school activities? Ss: Listen and answer. 5. Home work: (2’) - Translate the text into Vietnamese. - Prepare: B 1, 2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy:.

(67) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./10/ 2011. Period: 23. UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL B. 1, 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about subjects at school, schedules and regulations. + Ask and give direction. + Ask and answer places to find the books, in the library. 2. Skill: Pairpwork. To develop listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love subjects. Like talking about the subjects and library, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:….../ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions. + Do students usually wear school uniform in the USA? + What time do classes start? + What time do they finish? + How long do they have for lunch? *Key: - No, they don’t. - They start at 8.30. - They finish at 3.30 or 4 o’clock. - They have one hour for lunch. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic “Subjects”. * Networds:.

(68) Music Ss: Say and write. Geography 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at he picture and ask sthe questions. Ss: Look at the picture and answer the questions.. Maths subject ss. English. (10’). T: Reads the dialogue and presents the newwords. Ss: Write down. T: Guides Ss to practice the words. Ss: Practise. T: Presents the structure. Ss: Listen and write.. 3.3 Practice: (17’) T: Calls Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Practise in pair. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue and find information to answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives the key. Ss: Corrects and write down.. * Cue questions: + Where is this? + Why do you know?(What can you see?) + Who ars the childen? Do you think? + Who is the lady? Can you guess?. * Vocabulary: - library(n) - novel(n) - open(v) - rack: - close(v) - on the self: - Dictionary(n): - reference book(n) - on the right(left) - in the conner * Structure: + These racks have magazines - Those have newspapers. + The Math books are on the selves on the right. 1. Read the dialogue and answer the questions:. * Key: a. The magazines are on the racks (near the science book). b. The newspapers are on the racks. ( near the history book). c. The Math and science books are on the shelves on the left..

(69) T: Reads the dialogue twice. Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Calls Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Practise in pair. T: Asks Ss to see the picture of the libnrary, asks and answer the questions about the library in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Correct s mistakes.. d. The historty and geography book, dictionaries and literature in Vietnamese are on the selves on the right. e. The books in English are at the rack of the library. f.. The library opens at 7 am. 2. Read the dialogue then ask and answer the questions about the library in B1: Ex:Where can I find the(math) book? They are on the self on the left. or Where are the (math) book? Ex: S1: Where can I find the math and science books? S2: They bare on the self on the left. S1:……………………………. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about the subjects at school, schedules and regulations”. + What does the library have? + What time does it open? + What time does it close? + Who is the librarian? Ss: Listen and answer. 5. Home work: (2’) - Leant by heart the newwords. - Do exercises: 1,2 /in workbook - Prepare: B 4, 5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(70) Ngày……….tháng………năm 2011. Kiểm tra giáo án: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./10/ 2011. Period: 24. UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL B. 3 - 5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review the words learned in the topic library. Read comprehension about one library in the world. 2. Skill: Pairpwork, groupwork. To develop listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the library, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions. + What time does the library open? + What time does it close? + Who are in the librarian? + Where are the magazines? *Key: - It opens at 7 o,clock. - It closes at 4.30. - They are studentd and the librarian. - They are on the racks in the middle..

(71) 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (10’) T: Gives Ss to look at the picture and guess. Ss: Look at the picture and guess position the shelves, racks, books and magazines in the library. T: Reads the text and asks Ss to listen 6’ and label for the shelves, racks in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Gives key by sub-board. * Key: Ss: Exchange the answers and correct. 1. study area 2. science + math 3. geography 4+5. Newspapers and magazines 6+7. English 8. Librarian’s desk. 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Asks Ss to look at he picture, * Cue questions: presents the text and ask sthe questions. + Where is the library? Ss: Look at the picture and listen. + How many books are there? + How many people work there? T: Reads the text and presents the * Vocabulary: newwords. - receive(v) : nhận được Ss: Write down. - contain(v) : chứa đựng T: Guides Ss to practice the words. - million(n) : hàng triệu Ss: Practise. - over : hơn, quá - employee(n) : công nhân 3.3 Practice: (15’) T: Calls Ss to read the text. 1. Read the dialogue: Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens and corrects mistakes T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the 2. Answer the questions: questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair..

(72) T: Checks the answers. Ss: Give the answers. T: Corrects and gives the key.. * Key: a. It is in Washington D.C the capital of the U.S.A. b. It has over one million books. c. It has about 1000 km of shelves. d. Over 5.000 people work there. e. Because it receives copies of all American books.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “listen the text and lable for position of the objects in the library, read comprehension the text and answer the questions”. Ss: Listen and answer. 5. Home work: (2’) - Translate the text into Vietnamese. - Do exercises: 3,4,5 /in workbook - Prepare: Correct the first written test. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./10/2011. Period: 25. CORRECT THE WRITTEN TEST. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to correct the mistakes in the written test. 2. Skill: To develop listening, speaking ,writing and reading skill. 3. Attitude: study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Papers, key..

(73) 2. Students’: notebook, pen. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…/17. out:…………………. 2. Correct the test: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time 2.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks some questions: + How are you? + What’s the date to day? + Have you done the test well? Ss: Answer the teacher.. 2. 2 Task 1: (8’) T: Reads the telephone numbers. Ss: Listen and tick. T: Calls Ss to read the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Read the telephone numbers last time and gives the key. Ss: Listen and check.. 2. 3 Task 2: T: Asks Ss to read the sentences and choose the right answers. Ss: Read the sentences and choose. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives the key.. (8’). 2. 4 Task 3: (10’) T: Calls Ss to read the passage. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to match and read the answers. Ss: Read the answers.. Content. Question I:. * Key: 1. 8. 833 272 2. 7. 654 591 3. 8. 262 116 4. 5. 821 047 Question II:. * Key: 1.C 2. A 3. B 6. D 7. A 8. B Question III:. * Matching:. 5. 8. 545 187 6. 4. 626 159 7. 8. 832 487 8. 8. 388 512. 4. A. 5. C 9.D 10.C.

(74) T: Corrects and gives the key.. T: Asks the questions. Ss: Answer the questions. T: Listen ,corrects and gives the key. 2. 5 Task 4: T: Calls 2 Ss to write the sentences on the board. Ss: Write the sentences. T: Corrects mistakes and gives key.. ( 8’). * Key: 1. – d; 2. – c; 3. – a; 4. – f; 5. – b; 6. – e. * Answer the questions: 1. There are four people in Hoa’s family. 2. She is a student. Question IV :. * Key: 1. Nice to meet you. 2.How far is it from your house to the market? 3.What a lovely bedroom! 4. She will go to Ha Noi tomorrow. 5.Lan is the most beautiful in my class.. 3. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. Correct mistakes in the test. Ss: Listen and say again. 4. Homework: (1’) - Prepare: Unit 4: At School- A 1, 2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./10/ 2011. Period: 26. UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY A. 1.

(75) I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about the subjects at school, studying activities. Ask and answer about activities in the classes. 2. Skill: Pairpwork, groupwork. To develop speaking and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love school, subjects. Like talking about favorite subjects at school, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions. + Where is the library of Congress? + How many books does it have? + How long are its shelves? + How many people work there? *Key: - It is in Washington D.C,the capital of the USA. - It contains over 100 million books. - It has about 1,000 km of shelves. - It has over 5,000 employees. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities 3.1 Warm up: T: Gives a game “Slap-board”. Ss: Play game.. Time (5’). Content * Slap-board: English Music math physics History. Geograph y.

(76) 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss some questions: + How many days a week do you go to school? + What time do you go to school? + What time do classes begin? + How many subjects do you study? Ss: Answerr the questions. T: Presents content of the text about Mai and read the text once. Ss: Listen. T: Presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write T: Guides Ss to practice the words. Ss: Practise.. (8’). 3.3 Practice: T: Gives Ss to read the text and checks some students. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to make up the questions and answer about Mai in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pair. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects and gives the cue questions. Ss: Corrects and write down.. (20’). * Vocabulary: - experiment (n): - to learn(v) : - how to : - about :. Thí nghiệm Học như thế nào về, khoảng. * Read the dialogue. Then make up the questions and answer.. Ex: S1: What does she learn at school? S2: At school, She learn about lots of different things. * Cue questions: + What does Mai do in her physics class? + What time do classes begin? + Which grade is she in? + How many days a week does Mai go to school?. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about Mai and the subjects at school” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Translate the text into Vietnamese ..

(77) - Do exercises: 1,2 /in workbook - Prepare: A 2, 3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./10/ 2011. Period: 27. UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY A. 2, 3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the passages about Ba and read the dialogue to do the math exercise. 2. Skill: Pairpwork, groupwork. To develop reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love school, subjects for example math. Like talking about favorite subjects at school, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions about Mai. + What time do classes begin? + What time do they finish? + Which subject is Mai interested in ? *Key: - They begin at 7 o’clock. - They finish at a quarter past eleven. - Mai is very interested in computer. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’).

(78) T: Gives Ss to write the words Ss: Write the words.. * Networds: Math. English Subjects. Geography 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Gives Ss to look at the picture and presents about Ba.This is ba. He is learning how to repair a socket board in picture1 and he is playing the guitar in picture 2. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Reads the texts once and presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practice the words. Ss: Practise. T: Presents structure.. Physics. * Vocabulary: - to enjoy (v) - electronics (n) - to prepair(v) - household(n) - to fix (v) - appliance - to draw (v) - light * Structures: + Does Ba like English? + Which subjects does ba like? + What’s his favoritesubject? - He likes…………best. + What does he learn to do in……?. T: Presents the math exercise and some words. 3.3 Practice: (20’) T: Calls Ss to read the passages. 1. Read the passages about Ba and Ss: Read aloud. answer the questions: T: Asks Ss to answer the questionsin pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives key. * Key: Ss: write down. a. Ba likes electronics best. b. Yes, he does. he enjoys school very much..

(79) T: Reads the dialogue once and gives some words. Ss: Write down. T: Gives Ss to read the words. Ss: Practise. T: Calls Ss to read the dialogue. Ss: Practise in pair. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue and answer the question in group of six. Ss: Answer the question in group of six. T:Checks the answer and gives key. Ss: Give the answer and write down.. c. He learns to repair house holdappliance. d. He will be able to repair his own appliances. e. Yes, he is. His drawings are very good. f. Students’ answer. g. Students’ answer. 2. How much does one bnana cost? – problem(v) - price(v) - difficult(adj) - correct (v) - erase(v). * Key: - It costs 6.000đ. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Read comprehension the passage about Ba. And do the math exercise.” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Translate the text into Vietnamese . - Do exercises: 3 / 28, 29 in workbook. - Prepare: A. 4 – 3 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date:. Period: 28.

(80) 7A:…./10/ 2011. UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY A. 4 - 6. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to listen to get to know the subjects, talk about the school subjects, and discuss the subjects. 2. Skill: Pairpwork. To develop listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love school, subjects. Like talking about subjects at school, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Read the text and answer the questions about Ba. + Which subjects does Ba like best? + What does he learn to do in electronics? + What does Ba do in his free time ? *Key: - He likes electonics best. - He learns to repair household appliances. - He learns to play the guitar. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (7’) T: Gives Ss to look at the picture and get to know the subjects. Ss: Look at the pictures. T: Plays the tape and asks Ss to listen 5’ and write the subjects which Hoa and Ba study on saturday in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives key. * Key: Ba : d, a, e..

(81) Hoa; c, d, e. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Presents and read the text once. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Presents the vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss tread the words. Ss: Practise.. (8’). 3.3 Practice: T: Calls Ss to read the passages. Ss: Read aloud. T: Calls Ss to answer the questions . + What do we study at school? + What do we learn in literature /history /geography? Ss: Answer the questions. T: Corrects and remarks. T: Asks Ss to discuss and odd one out in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the anwers. T: Corrects and gives key.. (18’). T: Asks Ss to match the subjects with the words in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Give the answers. T: Corrects and uses sub-board to give key.. 5’. * Vocabulary: - essays(n) - events - around - author (n). - equations (n) - caculator(n) - globe - atlas. 1.Read the passage about subjects at school.. * Discuss and odd one out. * Key: - Literature: painting. - History: basketball games. - Science: preposition. - English: England. 2. Match each subject to the correct items:. * Key: - Physical Education: games, running shoes, ball. - Geography: map, globe, atlas. - Music: piano, guitar, songbooks..

(82) - Art: paint, pencils, paper. - Math: graphs, equations, calculator 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Listen and get to know the subjects. Read the text about the subjects and discuss the subjects” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Translate the text into Vietnamese . - Do exercises: 4, 5 / 29, 30 in workbook. - Prepare: B. 1, 2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./10/ 2011. Period: 29. UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY B. 1, 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk and describe recess activities. 2. Skill: Pairpwork. To develop listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love school, friends and activities at recess. Like playing games, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Read the text and answer the questions about the subjects. + What do we study in English/ History/ Physics….? *Key: - In English. We study many other things as well, such as Music, Sports and Art..

(83) - In History, We study past and present events in Viet Nam and around the world. - In Physics, we learn about how things work. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic “ Games”. Skip Ss: Write the games. T: Remarks.. Content chess Game s. (Play) badminton 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at ther pictures and asks the questions. + Where are the children? + What are they doing? + Do you like these games? Ss: Look at the pictures and answer the questions. T: Reads the text and presents the vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to read the words. Ss: Practise. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. Soccer. (8’). * Vocabulary: - recess(n) - blind man’s bluff(n) - catch(n) - marble (n) - skip-rope(n) * Structure: + It’s time for……………… Ex: It’s time for recess.. 3.3 Practice: (20’) T: Calls Ss to read the passages. 1. Read the passage. Ask and Ss: Read aloud. answer questions about students in T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the pictures: questions about students in the pictures in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ex A: What is this boy doing? Ss: Practise. B: He’s playing catch..

(84) T: Corrects mistakes and remarks. T: Asks Ss to ask and answer questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects mistakes(if any).. T: Presents the listening and characters: Mai, Kien, Ba, Lan are at recess and reads the text. Ss: Listen and match in group of six. T: Uses the sub-board and gives key. Ss: Exchange the answers and compare the answers.. 2. Ask and answer questions with a partner.. 5’. Ex: S1: What do you usually do at recess? S2: I often play soccer. S1: Do you usually talk with your friends? S2: Yes, I do. S1: What do you usually do after school? S2: I read books 3. Listen and match each name to an activity. + What games are they playing? * Key: - Mai is playing catch. - Kien is playing blind man’s bluff. - Lan is skipping rope. - Ba is playing marble.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk and describe recess activities.” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Translate the text into Vietnamese . - Do exercises: 1 /30, 31 in workbook. - Prepare: B. 3 - 5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./10/ 2011. Period: 30. UNIT 5: WORK AND PLAY.

(85) B. 3,4 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to get to know more words about topic “recess”, read comprehension the text, ask and answer about activities at reces of American students. 2. Skill: Pairpwork, groupwork. To develop speaking and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love school, friends.like study activities at recess, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions. + Do you like playing marbles? + Do you play soccer? + What do you do at recess? *Key: - Yes, I do./ No, I don’t. - Yes, I do./ No, I don’t. - I play soccer/skip/talk to friends…….. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Slap-board: T: Gives a game. Ss: Play games. eat, T: Remarks. drink marble. catch chat. skiprope 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss some questions + What do Vietnamese students often do at recess?. (8’). blind man.

(86) + Do you know what activities in other countries, in the USA often do at recess? + What activiries do you like? Ss: Answer the questions. T: Reads the text and presents the * Vocabulary: vocabulary. - energetic(adj): hiếu động Ss: Listen and write down. - penpal(n): bạn tâm thư T: Guides Ss to read the words. - portable(adj): có thể mang theo được Ss: Practise. - swap(v): trao đổi 3.3 Practice: (19’) T: Calls Ss to read the text. 1. Read the passage. Then choose Ss: Read aloud. the correct answers. T: Asks Ss to make the list activities at recess in America. Ss: Make the list and be concerned with activities in Viet nam. T: Asks Ss to find the answers in 5’ group of six. Ss: Works in group of six. T: Checks the answers and gives key. * Key: a. C; b. A; c. D; d. D Ss: Read the answers. T: Guides Ss to practise. 2. Take a survey (If any): Ss: Work in pair. * Cue questions: + What do you usually do at recess? + Do you play soccer/ skip rope…or do other things? T: Calls some Ss to tell about your Ex: At recess, Trang skips rope. Trang friend’s activities at recess. plays catch with other friends, and Ss: Say before the class. Lan read a book… T: Corrects mistakes(if any). 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Read comprehension the text and answer about activities at recess of American students.” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Translate the text into Vietnamese . - Do exercises: 2, 3 /31, 32 in workbook..

(87) - Prepare: Unit 6. After School. A.1. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Ngày ……...tháng.......... năm 2011. Kiểm tra giáo án dân chủ: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………….. Teaching date: Period: 31 7A:…./11/ 2011 UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL. A. 1 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about popular activities after school, make suggestions(offers), and reply. 2. Skill: Pairpwork. To develop listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love sports and activities after school. Like activities after school, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………..

(88) 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions. + What do you usually do at recess? + Do you play soccer/skip rope/play marble…? *Key: - I usually talk to my friends. - Yes, I do./No, I don’t. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic “activities after * Networds: school”. Play games watch T.V Ss: Write words. T: Remarks and gives Ss to read the Activities words. after school Ss: Read aloud. do the housework 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Reads the dialouge and presents the * Vocabulary: vocabulary. - relax (v): thư giãn Ss: Listen and write down. - good ideas (phra): ý kiến hay T: Guides Ss tread the words. - to invite (v): mời Ss: Practise. - practise (v): luyện tập T: Presents the structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. * Structure: + Let’s go to the cafeteria. the cinema. the zoo. - Use this structure to offer somebody to do something with us. + Modal verb: should: nên Ex: You should do the homework you should play sports. - Use to advice sd to do something. + Present progressive: Use to express an action happening at the moment of speaking. Ex: He is playing the guitar..

(89) He is writing a letter. T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and answer the question. + What do you often do after school? Ss: Look at the picture and answer the question. 3.3 Practice: T: Reads the dialogue one more time. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls some pairs. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue again and find information to answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects and gives key. Ss: Write down.. (18’) 1. Read the dialouge.. 2. Answer the questions:. * Key: a. She is doing her math homework. b. They are going to get a cold drink in the cafeteria. c. He is in the music room. d. He’s learning to play the guitar. e. He usually meets his friends. f. She likes playing volleyball.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about popular activities after school, make suggestions(offers), and reply”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Practise the dialogue again . - Do exercises: 1 /33 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 6. After School. A.2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy:.

(90) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./11/ 2011. Period: 32. UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL A. 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review about popular activities after school, ask and answer for activiries after school, using aderbs of frequency: always, usually, often, sometimes, never. 2. Skill: Pairpwork. To develop speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love sports and activities after school, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Read the dialogue and answer the questions. + What is Hoa doing? + What does Minh usually do after school? *Key: - She is doing her math homework. - He usually meets his friends. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the questions. Ex: Ss: Answer the question. T: What do usually do after school? Ss: I usally play soccer. T: Remarks . 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Asks: What are you doing? What are they doing?.

(91) Ss: Answer the questions. T: Asks: Ss: Answer. T: Presents the structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Gives Ss to look at the pictures and give name of each picture in group of four with cards. Ss: Look at the pictures and give name of each picture in group of four. T: Calls Ss to stick the cards on the board. Ss: Stick the answers on the board.. T: Corrects the answers and gives key.. T: Asks Ss : + What do you usually do after school? Ss: Anwer for each day of the week. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Answer the question. T: Corrects and gives key. Ss: Write down.. * Structures: + What do you do after school? - I do my homework. - Adverbs of frequency: always, usually, often, sometimes, never. Ex: + How often do you study in the library?. - I always study in the library after school. (19’) 5’ 1. Look at these activities. Label the pictures:. * Key: 1. Reading/ Studying in the library. 2. Swimming in the pool. 3. Playing computer games. 4. Going to a movie. 5. Playing soccer. 6. Watching T.V. 2. Ask and answer the questions, using the adverb of frequency:. * Key: - On Mondays, I usually do my homework with Ba and Hoa after.

(92) school. - On Tuesday, I sometimes go swimming with my friends atfter school. - On wednesday,after school I often play computer games with my friend. - I never go to the movie on thursdays. - I aways watch T.V on Friday evenings. * How often? T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the question using “How often..?” in pair. Ss: Work in pair. Ex: T: Checks some pairs. S1: How often do you go to the Ss: Practise before the class. movie? T: Corrects and remarks. S2: I sometimes to go to the movie. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Review popular activities after school, Ask and answer the question “ How often?” using adverbs of frequency”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise speaking to activities after school . - Do exercises: 2,3 /33 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 6. After School. A.3 - 5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./11/ 2011. Period: 33. UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL A. 3,4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:.

(93) 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to practise the words about activities after school. Read comprehension the text, ask and answer for characters’activities(students class 7 A) at recess. - Listen and get to know the information after school. 2. Skill: Pairpwork, groupwork. To develop reading and listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love friends and hobbies. Like talking about friends’ hobbies, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, casettle,tape. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions. + What do you usually do after school? *Key: - I usually/sometimes/often….play soccer.. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic “at recess”. * Networds: Ss: Write activities. play marble blind man’s bluff T: Gives Ss to read the words . at recess catch 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and guess characters in the pictures what they are doing. Ss: Look at the pictures and guess. T: Asks: What activities do you like take part in at recess? Ss: Answer: I like taking part in watching TV… T: Reads the text and presents. (10’). * Vocabulary:. talk to friends.

(94) vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss practice the words. Ss: Practise in chorus and individual.. 3.3 Practice: T: Gives Ss to read silent the text and compare with predition first. Ss: Read and compare. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find the answers in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls some pairs to practice before the class. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects the answers and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to read the names and activities. Ss: Read the names and activities. T: Plays the tape and asks Ss to listen and match in group of six.. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the results. T: Corrects and gives key. Ss: Write down.. - pastime(n): - theater (n): - anniversary(n): - celebration(n): - stamp(n): - collector(n): - lie (v):. trò tiêu khiển văn nghệ lễ kỷ niệm tổ chức tem người thu thập nằm. (17’) 1. Read the text and answer the questions:. * Key: a. Her group is rehearsing a play for the school anniversary celebration. b. He gets American stamps from Liz, his American friend. c. The stamp collector’s club meets on wednesday afternoon. d. Nam never plays games. 2. Listen and match each name to an activity: 5’. * Key: a. Mai: - go to the school ceferteria. b. Nam: - rehearse a play. c. Ba: - go to the circus. d. Lan: - watch movie..

(95) e. Kien: - tidy the classroom. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Read comprehension the text, listen and get to know the activities at recess”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Read and translate the text in to Vietnamese . - Do exercises: 4 /34 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 6. After School. B.1. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Ngày……..tháng……năm 2011. Kiểm tra giáo án:. ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:…./11/ 2011. Period: 34. UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL B. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about activities after school, make invitation somebody do something, and refuse or accept invitation. 2. Skill: Groupwork, pairwork. To develop reading and listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love friends and hobbies. Like talking about activities in free time, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, casettle,tape. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook..

(96) III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions. + What is Nga’s group doing? + Who give Ba the stamps? + How often does Nam do? *Key: - Her group are rehearsing a play for the school anniversary celebration. - Liz, American friend give him stamps. - He usually goes home and watches videos. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic “activities after * Networds: school”. play marbles play scoccer Ss: Write activities. activities T: Gives Ss to read the words . after watch TV 3. 2 Presentation: T: Gives Ss to look at the picture and presents the dialogue: Ba, Nam, Lan, Hoa are talking to each other what they should do to relax in this evening. Ss: Guess what activities they will talk about in their talking. T: Makes the cue questions: Ss: Answer the questions.. T: Plays the tape. Ss: Listen and compare guessing first with content of the story. Is it appropriate?. T: Presents structure.. help mom. (8’). * Cue questions: + Where will they go? + Who will they go with? + Who won’t go?. * Structures: + Should: nên ( model verb).

(97) - Use “should” to advide sb to do sth Ex: You should do the homework. You should get up early. - Invite somebody to do somethging. + What about going to the movie? - I’m sorry. I can’t come. + Let’s go to my house. – Ok. I’ll. + Why don’t you relax? – Great. + Are you going to come? – Good idea! 3.3 Practice: (19’) T: Plays the dialogue. 1. Read the dialogue: Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in 5’ goup of four. Ss: Work in group of four. T: Calls some groups to practice before the class. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and remarks. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue again 2. Answer the questions: and find the answers in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answer. T: Listens , corrects and gives the key. Key: a. Nam wants to go to the movie. b. Lan doesn’t want to go to the movie because there aren’t any good movies at the moment. c. Lan wants to listen to some music at her house. d. Hoa doesn’t want to go to Lan’s house because she has to many assignments. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about activities after school and make invitation”.

(98) Ss: Listen and say again. T: Gives an exercise:write sentences to advice sb to do sth use “should” a. Nam/do the homework. * Key: a. Nam should do the homework. b. Mai/get up/ early. b. Mai should get up early. c. you/work hard. c. You should work hard. Ss: Write the sentences. 5. Home work: (2’) - Read the dialogue again and do exercises: 1 /35 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 6. After School. B.2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./11/ 2011. Period: 35. UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL B. 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about popular activities for American teenagers after school, get to know about Vietnamese students and American students’ hobbies after school. 2. Skill: Groupwork. To develop reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love friends and hobbies. Like talking about activities for American teenagers and Vietnamese teenagers, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, cards. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (15’) Test : 15’ *Requirement: Exercise 1: Underline the appropriate words to complete the sentences(5marks): 1. Mai…..(go/goes/to go) to the school cafeteria..

(99) 2. Let’s…(do/does/did) the homework. 3. Lan wants to ….(listens/to listen/listen) to some music. 4. You shouldn’t…..(stay/stayed/to stay) up late. 5. Let’s …..(goes/go/to go) fishing. Exercise 2: Complete the sentences using the cue words(marks): 1. Let’s/go/the movie. 2. She/want/listen/music. 3. He/never/play/scoccer. 4. I/like/read/novel. 5. What/should/you/do/evening/? *Key: Exercise1: 1. goes 2. do 3. listen 4. stay 5 go Exercise 2: 1. Let’s go to the movie. 2. She wants to listen to music. 3. He never plays soccer. 4. I like reading book. 5. What should you do in this evening? 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Calls 2 Ss to write sentences with + Let’s play soccer. “Let’s” and answers. - OK. Ss: Write sentences. + Let’s come to my house. T: Gives remarks. - I’m sorry, I can’t come. Thanks. 3. 2 Presentation: (6’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + Do you know any activity organization for teenager? + What do you know for scout organization or guides organization? T: Explains meaning of “ scouts and - Scout = boy scouts( Nam hướng đạo guides organization” sinh) Ss: Listen and write. -Guide =girl guide(BE) Nữ hướng =girl guide (AmE) đạo sinh T: Gives Ss to guess activities for American teenagers..

(100) Ss: Guess. 3.3 Practice: (13’) T: Gives Ss to read the text and gives name of activities/organizations are talked in the exercise and then compare with guessing them. Ss: Read and compare with the guessing. T: Calls Ss to read the text . 1. Read the text and answer Ss: Read aloud. questions: T: Listens and remarks. Ex: T: Asks Ss to read the text again and T: Which of the activities in the list answers the questions. for American teenagersdo you think Ss: Read the text an answer. are also popular among Vietnamese teenager? S1: Watch television, listen to music, go to the movies, help old people. T: Are there many kind of entertainment for teenagers in Viet Nam ? What are they? S2: Yes. T: What organization are there for teenagers in Viet Nam? S3: There are organizations such as young pioneers or different kinds of club for children. T: Are there similar to scout and guide in western countries? S4:…………………………….. T: Asks Ss to discuss in group of six. 2. Disscuss: You think activities teenagers usually take part in out side activities. 5’ Ss: Discuss in group of six. T: Asks Ss to discuss and choose ten * Cue activities: activities which Vietnamese teenagers 1. Watch Television. like best. 2. Play soccer. Ss: Dicuss. 3. Play badminton. T: Checks groups . 4. Help old people..

(101) Ss: Read the result.. 5. Listen to music. 6. Go shopping. 7. Collect stamps. 8. play computer games. 9. Help mom the housework. 10. learn to play a musical instrument such as piano.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about activities for American teenagers after school” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Read the text again . - Do exercises: 3,4 /38 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 6. After School. B.3-5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./11/ 2011. Period: 36. UNIT 6: AFTER SCHOOL B. 3 - 5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to get to know the way of making the meeting. + invite someone to do something: “Would you like to…….?” + accept or refuse invitation. + Listen and practise the dialogue in the right tune. 2. Skill: Groupwork, pairwork. To develop listen and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love activities for teenagers, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’).

(102) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (5’) *Requirement: Answer the questions: + How many popular activities for American teenagers? + What are they? *Key: - There are ten popular activities for American teenagers. - ( P65) 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks some Ss the question. + What do you do in your free time? Ss: Answer the questions. + Do you watch TV? T: Gives remarks. + Do you play soccer? ………………….. 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Presents the dialogue between Nga, Lan, and Hoa. They will invite sb to do things. We listen to the dialogue. hey invite each other and accept or refuse. Ss: listen to the teacher. T: Plays the tape the dialogues twice. Ss: Listen to the tape. T: Presents structure. * Structure: Ss: Listen and write down. + Would you like to…….? - We use it to invite sb to do sth. Ex: Would you like to go picnic? - Yes, I’d like to. But I have many exercises to do. - Ok. - Yes, I’d love to. Sorry,I can’t go. I’m not sure. 3.3 Practice: (20’) T: Plays the tape again. 1. Practise the dialogues and make Ss: Listen to the dialogues the same the dialogues: T: Asks Ss to read the dialogues in pair..

(103) Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls somes pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and remarks. T: Asks Ss to make the same dialogues in pair and helps Ss to practise( use sub-board). Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects mistakes.. Ex: Hue : It’s my birthday on saturday. Would you like to come to my house for dinner? Hien : Yes, I’d love to. What time? Hue : At six o’clock. Hien : I’ll be there. Hue : I’ll see you on saturday. 2. Read the text “ Community Service”:. T: Asks Ss some questions. + What can teenagers do to help ? + How do teenagers help people? Ss: Read the text and answer. T: Asks Ss to read the text and discuss * Questions: to give the answers in group os six. a. How do some teenagers help the Ss: Work in group of six. community? T: Calls each represent of groups to b. How do Vietnamese teenagers help talk the result of dicussion the community? Ss: Say the result. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “invite sb to do sth and dicuss about Vietnamese teenagers help the community”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Read the text again . - Do exercises 2 /37 in workbook. - Prepare: Language Focus 2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(104) Ngày……..tháng……năm 2011. Kiểm tra giáo án: .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................... ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:…./11/ 2011. Period: 37. LANGUAGE FOCUS 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review and consolidate the knowledge learned from Unit 4 to Unit 6. + Present progressive tense. + This and That, These and those. + Time,subjects, adverbs of frequency: always, usually, often, sometimes, never. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop speaking and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (4’) *Requirement: Invite your friend to do sth. *Key: + Would you like to go fishing? - OK. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (4’) T: Gives Ss to do exercise: using the * Put the verbs in the correct form: present progressive. 1. She……(skip rope)..

(105) Ss: Complete the sentences. T: Gives remarks.. 3. 2 Activity 1: T: Gives Ssto look at the picture and asks: What are they doing? Ss: Look at the picture and answer. T: Asks Ss to repeat the use of the present progressive tense. Ss: Repeat. T: Asks Ssto complete the passage. Ss: Read and complete the passage. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives key.. (6’). 3.3 Activity 2: T: Asks Ssto look at the pictures and fill appropriate words in the brackets with This/that and these/those. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects mistakes and gives key. Ss: Listen and write down.. (5’). 2. I…..(play) soccer. 3. They……(watch) TV. 4. He…..(listen) to music. 5. Lan and Hoa….(play) badminton. * Key: 1. .is skipping rope. 5...are playing.. 2. …am playing… 3. …are watching…. 4. ….is listening…. 1. Exercise 1: Present progressive tense:. + I He/She We/They/You. am is are. + V-ing. * Key: ...is doing…is writing…is reading…... is cooking.....are playing….is running…… 2. Exercise 2. This and that, these and those. Complete the dialogue:. * Key: a. This room is very untidy- Sorry Mum. b.- Put this bag away. - That isn’t my bag, Mum. This is my bag. c. Put those dirty socks in the washing basket. - These socks?.

(106) 3. 4 Activity 3: T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and write the correct time and guide Ss to do exercise. Ss: Look at the pictures and write the time. T: Calls some Ss to write the time. Ss: Write the answers. T: Corrects and gives key.. (5’). 3.5 Activity 4: T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and say subjects. Ss: Look at the pictures and say. T: Asks Ss to write the subjects with pictures using the subjects in the box. Ss: Write the subjects. T: Calls Ss to write the subjects. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects and gives key.. (4’). 3.6 Activity 5: T: Asks Ss to repeat the adverbs of frequency.. (5’). - No, Those socks on the bed. d. The own away these commics. But I like these commics, Mum. 3. Exercise 3: Write the correct time: Ex: a. Nam: It’s nine forty. It’s twenty to ten.. * Key: b. Hoa: It starts at seven fifteen. It stars at a quarter past seven. c. No, I’ll be home at half past ten. No, I’ll be home at ten thirty. d. Yes, Miss Lien. I’ll come at a quarter to seven. Yes, Miss Lien. I’ll come at seven forty-five. 4. Exercise 4: Subjects:. * Key: a. Physical Education. b. Chemistry. c. Math. d. Geography. e. English. f. History. 5. Exercise 5:Adverbs of frequency: + Adverbs of frequency: always, usually, often, sometimes, never..

(107) Ss: Repeat. T: Asks Ss to write the sentences about Ba base on the timetable. Ss: Write the sentences. T: Calls Ss to read the sentences. Ss: Read the sentences. T: Listens and corrects.. 3.7 Activity 6: T: Asks Ss to write down possible dialogue base on the dialogues and cue words in pair. Ss: Write the same dialogues in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Read the dialogue. T: Listens and corrects.. (6’). * Key: + Ba seldom rides a bike to school. + Ba always practises the guitar after school. + Ba usually does his homework in the evening. + Ba sometimes plays computer games. 6. Exercise 6: Making suggestions:. Ex: + Thanh: Let’s play volleyball. Lan: Ok. + Hai: Would you like to watch movies? Son: I’d love to. + Hoa: Should we play soccer? Tuan: I’m sorry. I can’t. + Hang: Would you like to come to my house? Quang: I’m sorry. I can’t.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Review and consolidate the knowledge learn from Unit 4 to Unit 6” + Present progressive tense. + This and that, These and those. + Time, subjects, adverbs of frequency. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Do exercises..

(108) - Prepare: Do the second written test. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 38 7A:……/11/2011 THE SECOND WRITTEN TEST I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Checking the students’ knowledge, vocabulary and grammar from Unit4 to Unit 6. Ss apply the knowledge learned to do the test. + Vocabulary: preposition, adverbs of frequency. + Grammar: Present simple tense, present progressive tense, verbs + V-ing. + Listening: Talk about working day. + Reading: Talk about hobbies. + Writing: - Let’s…,Present progressive, time, subjects, Present simple with adverds of frequency. 2. Skill: Develop listening, reading and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love learning English, do the test seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Questionaire. 2. Students’: Papers, pens. III. Procedure: 1. Organization: (1’) 7A:……/17 out:…………………. 2. Test: A. Matrix: Level Apply Grasp Realize Total Standard throughly Low High (Unit 4-6) - Listen to the passage about working day Listening (Unit: 5) Sen: 5 Sen...: 5 Point: 2,5 Point: 2,5 Percent:25 %.

(109) - Preposition of time: at - It’s time (for) - How often - Adverbs of frequency. Vocabulary - present and grammar progressive. (Unit:4,5,6) - like + V-ing - to be good at - Let’s Sen: 8 Point: 2pts Percent:20 %. Sen: 8 Point: 2 - Read the passage about hobbies.. Reading (Unit: 5). Sen: 6 Point: 3 Percent: 30%. Sen: 6 Point: 3 - Let’s… - Present progressive. - Time. - Subjects. - Present simple with adverds of frequency.. Writing (Unit:4,5,6). Sen...: 5 Point: 2,5. Sen:5 Point: 2,5 Percent:25 % Total Sen: 24 Point: 10 Percent: 100%. Sen: 5 Sen: 10 Point: 2,5 Total Point: 5,5 Percent: Percent: 55 % 25% B. Questions: Question I: Listen to the passage and check (V) in the correct boxes( 2,5 marks): Sen: 8 Point: 2 Percent: 20 %. 1. 2.. a. My father is a driver. b. My father is a teacher. a. He works for a company in Ha Noi. b. He works for a factory in Ha Noi..

(110) 3.. a. Sometimes he go to works late and get home early. b. Sometimes he goes to work earlier and get home late. 4. a. He often goes to Hai Phong on business. b. He goes to Hai Phong on shopping. 5. a. He always travels to Ho Chi Minh or Hue. b. He never travels to Ho Chi Minh or Hue. Question II. Read the passage. Then checks the correct column according to the informations True(T), False (F) or not given(NG) and answer the questions (3 marks): Tuan goes to Thanh Phat school. He is in class 7A, and he enjoys school very much. His favorite subject is English. He speaks English very well, and he is sociable and generous. He is a good Student. In his free time. He often plays sports such as soccer, badminton, table tennis. Sometimes he listens to music and reads newspaper. * True(T), False(F) or not given(NG): 2marls. T F NG 1. Tuan goes to Thanh Phat school and he is in class 7B. 2. He doesn’t enjoy school. 3. His favorite subject is English 4. He doesn’t like swimming. * Answer the questions (1mark): 1. Does he like watching TV? 2. What does he often do in his free time? Question III. Choose the best answer (A,B,C or D) to complete these sentences (2 marks): 1.I have math……7.30. A. on B. in C. between D. at 2. Lan ……..English at the moment. A. are studying B. is studying C. am studying D.be studying 3. Ba…. fixing things. A. be good at B. good at C. is good at D. are good at 4. They like…. TV. A. watching B. to watch C. watch D. watches 5. It’s time …..recess. A. for B. at C. on D. in 6. What do you …..do after school? A.never B. usually C. often D. sometimes 7. Hoa! It is sunday tomorrow. Today we can relax. ……go shopping..

(111) A. We B. Let C. Let’s 8. How …. do you play soccer after school? A. usually B. never C. always. D. Lets D. often. Question IV: Rearrange the sentences into the meaning sentences (2,5 marks). 1. Lan/watches TV/after school/usually/. 2. Let’s/fishing/go/. 3. playing/is/he/marbles/. 4. do/what time/ go/you/to/bed/? 5. Nga/English class/at/ has/9.20/. C. Answers: Question I: * Tapescript: Workday My father is a driver. He works for a company in Ha Noi. Everyday he go to work at 6.00 a.m and comes back home at 5 p.m. Sometimes he goes to work earlier and get home late. He often go to Hai Phong on business. He never travels to Ho Chi Minh City or Hue. He loves his job very much. * Key : 1.a 2.a 3. b 4.a 5. b Question II: * True(T), False(F) or Not Given(NG): 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. NG * Answer the questions: 1. No, he doesn’t. 2. In his free time. He often plays sports such as soccer, badminton, table tennis. Sometimes he listens to music and reads newspaper. Question III: 1.D 3. C 5. A 7. C 2. B 4.A 6. B 8. D Question IV: 1. Lan usually watches TV after school. 2. Let’s go fishing. 3. He is palying marbles. 4. What time do you go to bed? 5. Nga has English class at 9.20. D. Marks: Question I : 2,5 marks( 0,5 x 5) Question III : 2 marks (0,25 x 8) Question II : 3 marks( 0,5 x 6) Questin IV : 2,5 marks( 0,5 x 5) 3. Consolidation: (3’) T: Hands in the papers -Remarks the test..

(112) 4. Homework: (1’) - Prepare : Review the Units learned.- correct the test * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy:. ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:…./11/ 2011. Period: 39. UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK A. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the dialogue about Hoa’ working day, tell about work activities yourselves. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love students’ work activities and vacation, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………. 2. Check up: (15’) - No check the old lesson( last period do the test ). 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks some Ss the question. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer the questions. + What do you do everyday? /every morning? + Which holidays do you have in one year? + What do you do in the summer vacation? …………………...

(113) T: Gives remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss: Ss: listen and answer the questions. T: Plays the tape once. Ss: Listen to the tape. T: Presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. (10’) * Cue questions: + What time do your classes start? + What time do they finish? + For how many hours a day do you do your homework? * Vocabulary: + late (adv). – vacation (n) - early (adv) - quite(adj) - talk about ( time) (v) - hard(adj) * Structure: + simple futrure: shall/will + V Ex: you’ll be late for school. I’m usually early. using adverbs: late, early, to talk about time. Ex: I won’t be late, If I get up early.. 3.3 Practice: (22’) T: Plays the tape twice. 1. Practise the dialogues and answer Ss: Listen to the dialogue and repeat to the questions: the tape. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogues in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls somes pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and remarks. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and 2. Answer the questions: find the information to answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Read the answers. T: Listens, corrects mistakes and gives * Key: key. a. Hoa’s classes start at 7 o’clock. Ss: listen and write down. b. they finish at a quarter to seven..

(114) c. Hoa does her homework 2 hours a day. d. She will visit her parents on their farm during her vacation. e, f, g ( students’ answers). T: Asks Ss to retell Hoa’s work activities.( T. helps Ss to retell) Ss: Say.. Ex: Hoa has breakfarst at half past six. She is usually early. The classes start at 7.00 and finish at a quarter past eleven.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about students’work activities and vacation. + You will be late for school. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Read the text again . - Do exercises 2,3 /43,44 in workbook. - Prepare: A. 2,3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./11/2011. Period: 40. UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK A. 2,3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about informatiom about activities everyday of American students, present vacations and holiday of America and public holidays. 2. Skill: Groupwork. To develop reading, listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love vacation and holidays. Like talking about vacation and holidays, study seriously..

(115) II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Retell about Hoa. * Key: Hoa is a new student in class 7A. She is from Hue. She lives with her aunt and uncle in Ha Noi. Hoa doesn’t any friend in Ha Noi…..Hoa is unhappy She misses herperents and friends. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer the questions. + What vacation is the longest in Viet Nam? + What do you usually do in that vacation? What vacations do you know? 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss Some questions: This is a letter from America. + Who wrote this letter? + To whom is it sent? Ss: listen and answer the questions. T: Reads the letter once and presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. * Vocabulary: Ss: Practise. - letter (n). – hear (v) - Easter (n) - spend(v) - Thanksgiving (n) - soon - Christmas(n) T: Presents structure. * Structure: Ss: Listen and write down. + Comparative: - Short adj + er + than.

(116) Ex: Hoa is taller than Lan Mekong river is longer than Red river. - few – fewer than Ex: Vietnamese students have fewervacations than American students. - Long adj + more + than Ex: Mai is more beautiful than Huong. + Superative: - Short adj : adj + est Ex: Our longest vacation is in the summer. - long adj: the most + adj Ex: Our most importaint vacations are Easter, Thanksgiving. 3.3 Practice: T: Calls Ss to read the letter. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls somes pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens, corrects and gives key.. T: Gives Ss to look at the pictures and guess what vacations are described in the pictures of America or England?. Ss: Look at the pictures. T: Plays the tape twice.( or read the. (17’) 1. Read and answer the questions:. * Key: a. Summer vacation is the longest in America. b. During his vacation Tim spends Tim with his family. c. Vietnamese students have fewer vacation than American students. 2. Listen. Write the name of the public holiday in each of these pictures:.

(117) sentences) and asks Ss to write the name of holiday in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Plays the tape one more time and gives the key.( Or read) Ss: listen and check.. * Key: a. Thanksgiving. b. Independence day c. New year’s Eve (day). d. Chritmas.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about vacations and holidays in America”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Read the letter again . - Do exercises 4 /44 in workbook. - Prepare: A. 4. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./11/ 2011. Period: 41. UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK A. 4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the passage about Hoa and answer the questions, compare about studytime between you and Hoa, comment to life of students. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love life of students. Like talking about students, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure :.

(118) 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + Which vacations do American students have? + What does Tim do during his vacation? * Key: - America students have summer vacation, Tet hiloday, Easter, 4th of July, Thanksgiving and christmas. - He usually spend time with his family on the vacations. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) Summ T: Gives a topic “vacations”. er holiday Thanksgiving Ss: Write the words. Vacations Tet holiday 3. 2 Presentation: T: Calls some Ss to tell about there life everyday and comment the life of Ss is easy or hard. Ss: Tell about their life. T: Asks Ss the questions. Ss: Answer the questions.. T: Reads the text once. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Calls Ss to read the text. Ss: Read aloud. T: Reviews for Ss structures. Ss: Listen.. T: Presents vocabulary.. (8’). * Cue questions: + How many periods do you have a day? + Do you have a long vacation? + How many hours do you work a week?. Ex: Students are fewer hours than any workers. Students work about 45 hours a week. This is more than some workers. * Vocabulary:.

(119) Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise.. - easy (adj). - work (v) - hard (adv) - typical(adj). - keen (v) - definetly(adv) - lazy(adj). 3. 3 Practice: (19’) T: Calls Ss to read the passage. * Read and answer the questions: Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls somes pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens, corrects and gives key. * Key: a. People think students have an easy life because they only work a few hours a day and have long vacations. b. Hoa works 20 hours a week. It is fewer than most workers work.. c. I work about one or two hours a week. d. No. The writer doesn’t think students are lazy. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “tell about life everyday for each student, comment to life of students”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Read the passage again . - Do exercises 1 /43 in workbook. - Prepare: B. 1.. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(120) Ngày……..tháng………năm 2011. Kiểm tra giáo án: …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:…./11/ 2011. Period: 42. UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK B. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to understand the life of American workers, understand the words about topic work, day off of American family. + What does Mrs. Jones work? 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love family, the work of people in the family. Like talking about a typical day of American, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions about Hoa: + Why do people think that students have an easy life? + How many hours does Hoa work a week? + How many hours do you work a week? * Key: - People think students have an easy life because they only work a few hours a day and have long vacations. - Hoa works 20 hours a week. - I work 18 hours a week. 3. Newlesson:.

(121) Teacher’s and Ss’ activities 3.1 Warm up: T: Asks Ss some the questions. Ss: Answer the questions. T: Listens and corrects.. Time (5’). T: Today we talk about a typical day of America. 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and presents the situation of the letter and then asks Ss to scan to get to know characters in the Tim’s family. Ss: Listen and read the text. T: Asks Ss the questions: + How many people are there in Tim’s family? + What do they do? + What does his mother/father do? Ss: Answer the questions. T: Reads the letter once. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Presents vocabulary. Ss: listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise.. T: Presents structure.. Content * Cue questions: + How many people are there in your family? + What do they do? + What does your father do? + What does your mother do? + What does your brother/sister do?. * Vocabulary: - to take care of - public holiday (v) - to be pleased - mechanic(n) - part-time(n) - shift(n) - local(n) - day off (n) - homeless * Structure: + Present simple tense: Ex: She works part-time. She takes care of the family. + Comparative: Ex: He has fewer day off than my Mom..

(122) 3.3 Practice: T: Calls Ss to read the letter. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls somes pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens, corrects and gives key.. (18’) * Read the letter and answer the questions:. * Key: a. Mrs. Jones works at home. But three mornings a week she works part-time at alocal super-market. b. She (together other women) cooks lunch for homelees people once a week. c. Mr. Jones is a mechanic. He repairs in a factory. d. He works about 40 hours a week. e. The Jones family always go to florida on vacation. They have a great time there.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about a typical day of American family” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Read the letter again . - Do exercises 1 /45 in workbook. - Prepare: B. 2 - 4.. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date:. Period: 43.

(123) 7A:…./12/ 2011. UNIT 7: THE WORLD OF WORK B. 2 - 4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about activities everyday of farmer, reda comprehension the text. Listen and take notes. 2. Skill: Grouprwork. To develop reading and listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love farmers, like about the farmers’ life, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, sub- board, cards. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions about Tim’s family: + What does Tim’s mother do? + What does she do for homeless people? + What does Tim’s father do? + How many hours does he usually work? * Key: - She works at home. - She cooks lunch for homeless people. - He is a mechanic. - He works about 40 hours a week. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic “ farm”. * Network: Ss: Write words. T: remarks and asks. rice paddy buffalo + What does a farmer work? Ss: Answer. farm rice 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and. (8’). cow.

(124) presents the situation of the text: Talk about activities everyday of a typical farmer. He is Hoa’s father. Ss: Look at the picture and listen to the teacher. T: Reads the text once and presents newwords. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to read the words. Ss: Practise. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down. * Vocabulary: - startwork(v) - to collect (v) - feed (v) - buffalo shed (n) - grow (v) - chicken coop (n) - main crop (n) * Structure: - When there is less work, he goes to the city. - When there is less work, Mr. Tuan takes a day off. + Less : little less. T: Explains “ less” Ss: Listen and write down. 3.3 Practice: (20’) T: Calls Ss to read the paragraph. 1. Read the paragraph: Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens and corrects mistakes pronunciation. T: Explains the requirement and hang 2.Compare: Mr.Jones(Tim’s father) the sub-board with the table notes of and Mr.Tuan(Hoa’s father): Tim’s father and Mr. Tuan. Ss: Listen and look at the sub-board. T: Asks Ss to work in group of six and 7’ devides group with cards. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Gives key and asks the groups to exchange the cards and compare. * Key: Ss: Exchange the card and compare hours Vacation and gives the remarks. per Days off time week a three Mr. Jones. 40. two. week - summer vacation.

(125) four or. Mr. Tuan. 84. five times a year. T: Devides the cards for groups and guides Ss to do exercise. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Plays the tape or reads the passages twice and asks Ss to complete the table in group of six. Ss: Listen and complete the table in goup of six. T: Gives the key and asks Ss to compare te answers. Ss: Compare and remarks.. no real vacation. 3. Listen and take notes:. 6’. * Key: Name Peter Susan Jane Phong. job. Hours. Amount of. per week. vacation. doctor. 70. nurse. 50. shop asisstant factory worker. four weeks three weeks. 35. one week. 48. two weeks. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about a typical day of a farmer, Hoa’s father and listen and take notes” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Read the passage again . - Do exercises 2, 3 /P46 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 8. Places : A. 1,2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…../12/2011. Period: 44. CORRECT THE SECOND WRITTEN TEST.

(126) I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to correct the mistakes in the written test. 2. Skill: To develop listening, speaking ,writing and reading skill. 3. Attitude: study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Papers, key. 2. Students’: notebook, pen. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……./17. out:…………………. 2. Correct the test: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 2.1 Warm up: (4’) T: Asks some questions: * Questions: Ss: Answer the teacher.. + How are you? + What’s the date to day? + Have you done the test well? 2. 2 Task 1: (8’) Question I: T: Reads the passage once again. Ss: Listen and tick. T: Calls Ss to read the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Reads the passage last time and * Key: gives the key. 1. a; 2. a; 3. b; 4. a; 5. b ; 6. a. Ss: Listen and check. 2. 3 Task 2: (10’) Question II: T: Calls Ss to read the passage. * True (T),False (F) or Not Given Ss: Read the passage aloud. (NG): T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. * Key: T: Corrects and gives the key. 1.F; 2. F; 3.T; 4. F; 5. T; 6. NG; * Answer the questions : T: Asks the questions. Ss: Answer the questions. T: Listen ,corrects and gives the key.. * Key:.

(127) 2. 4 Task 3: T: Calls Ss to read the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Gives key and explains. Ss: Listen and write down.. (9’). 2. 5 Task 4: T: Calls Ss to write the sentences on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects mistakes and gives the key.. (8’). 1. No, he doesn’t. 2. In his free time. He often plays sports such as soccer, badminton, table tennis. Sometimes he listens to music and read newspaper. Question III:. * Key: 1. D 5. D 2. B 6. A 3. C 7. B 4. A 8. C Question IV :. 9. A 10. D 11. D 12. C. * Key: 1. Lan usually watches TV after school. 2. Let’s go fishing. 3. He is palying marbles. 4. What time do you go to bed? 5. Nga has English class at 9.20.. 3. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. Correct mistakes in the test. Ss: Listen and say again. 4. Homework: (1’) - Prepare: Unit 8: Place - A 1,2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./12/ 2011. Period: 45. UNIT 8: PLACES A. 1,2.

(128) I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask for and show the way, ask for and give direction to the places, review some names of the places 2. Skill: Grouprwork, pairwork. To develop reading, speaking and listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love showing the way, like talking about showing the way in English , study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions about Hoa’s father: + What does Hoa’s father do? + How many hours does he work a week? + Does he have a vacation in a year? * Key: - He is a farmer. - He works for 84 hours a week. - No, he doesn’t. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (6’) T: Gives Ss to look at he photoes of * Cue question: projects in the book and asks the + What are English name of these question. buildings? Ss: Answer the question. T: Corrects mistakes and gives key. * Key: Ss: Listen and write down. a. National bank of Viet Nam( in Ha Noi). b. Saint Paul Hospital( in Ha Noi). c. Hotel (in Ha Noi). d. The central of post office (in Ha Noi). e. Ha Noi railway station. f. Dong Xuan Market ( in Ha Noi).

(129) 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Look at the picture answer the questions.. (9’) * Cue questions: + Who are they? + Where are they? +What does the tourist want?. T: Presents the situation of the dialogue: A tourist is asking the way and a student is showing the way for him. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Reads the dialogue once and presents the vocabulary. Ss: Lisren and write down. T: Guides Ss to read the words. Ss: Practise. T: Presents the structures. Ss: Listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Reads the dialogue twice. Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects pronunciation. T: Calls some Ss to ask the way to market, post office…. Ss: Practise. T: Helps Ss to practise.. * Vocabulary: - sourvenir shop(n) : cửa hàng đồ lưu niệm - straight : thẳng - go straight ahead : đi thẳng đường * Structure: + Asking the way: - Is there ……..near here? - Could you tell me how to get there? or: Could you tell me the way to….? - Could you show me the way to…..? * Answers: - Go straight ahead. -Turn left/turn right. (Take the first/ second road on the right/ left). (18’) 1. Read the dialogue:. Ex: S1: Could you show me the way to the market? S2: You go straight about 3 kilometers and turn right then go.

(130) T: Calls some Ss to read the dialogue. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks some Ss the questions. Ss: Look at the map and answer.. straight ahead about 4 kilometers. It’s on the left of the road. 2. Look at the street map. Practise asking for and directions to places: Ex: T: Where is the supermarket? S1: The supermarket is next to a factory and it’s opposite the shoe store.. T: Asks Ss to ask for and gives the directions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pair. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “asking the way, asking for and giving the directions”. – could you show me the way to….? - Could you tell me how to get there? - Could you tell me the way to…? + Where is the bank? Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Practise asking the way again. - Do exercises 1 /P47 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 8. Places : A. 3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./12/ 2011. Period: 46. UNIT 8: PLACES A. 3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:.

(131) 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask for the place and give the position of that place. Get to know to use the prepositions of position to describe the places. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love describe about the places , study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, map. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (15’) Test: 15’ * Requirement: Exercise 1. Complete the sentences, use the words in the brackets. 1. Hoa’s father …..(is/are/am) a farmer. 2. He …….(/to work/work/works) more than hours than Tim’s father. 3. (Does/Do/Did)………..they like playing soccer? 4. (Could/Can/May) …….you show me the way to the post office? 5. Hoa works ………(much/many/more) hours than some worker. Exercise 2. Answer the questions: 1. What time do your classes start? 2. How many hours a week do you work? 3. What does Mr. Tuan do? 4. Could you show me the way to the market? * Key: Exercise 1. 1. is 2. works 3. Do 4. Could 5. more Exercise 2. 1. They start at 7.30. 2. I work about ……..hours a week. 3. He is a farmer. 4. You go straght ahead. Take the fisrt road on the right. You go straight about 3 kilometers. It’s on your left 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (6’) T: Tells the places, you learned. * Some places: school, restaurant, Ss: Say. market, police station, T: Gives the remarks..

(132) 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the map and presents structure. Ss: Look at the map and write down.. (9’) * Structure: + Ask for and give the direction: Ex: A: Where is the bank? B: The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant. It’s opposite the hospital. * Prepositions: between, infront of, next to, opposite, behind, to the right of……….. Ex: Where is the bank? - It’s between the hotel and the restaurant. It’s oposite the hospital.. T: Presents the prepositions to describe the position of the place. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Gives an example. Ss: Listen and write down. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to look at the map and guides Ss to ask and give direction to these places. Ss: Look at the map and listen to the teacher.. T: Calls Ss to read the example. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to ask the places in the box in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Gives the remarks. T: Explains the requirement of the exercise: look at the map, listen and write the places. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Reads the sentences twice, and asks Ss to listen and write the places in group.. (18’) 1. Look at this street map. Ask for and give direction to these places: Ex: S1: Where is the supermarket? S2: The supermarket is next to a factory and it’s opposite the shoe store.. 2. Look at the street map again. Listen and write the places:. 5’.

(133) Ss: Listen and write the places in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives key.. * Key: a. sourvenir shop. b. shoestore. c. hotel.. d. drugstore. e. hospital.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “ Ask for and give direction to the place: + Where is the bank? - It’s between the hotel and the restaurant. It’s oposite the hospital. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Practise structures again. - Do exercises 3 /P48 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 8. Places : A. 4, 5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./12/ 2011. Period: 47. UNIT 8: PLACES A. 4, 5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask and answer about distance between two places. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop speaking and listening skill 3. Attitude: Love talking about distance between the cities, like talking about distance in English , study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, map in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook..

(134) III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions about Hoa’s father: + Where is the bank? + Where is the supermarket? + Where is the bookstore? * Key: - The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant. It’s opposite the hospital. - It is next to a factory and it’s opposite the shoestore. - The bookstore is ….. . 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (6’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue question: Ss: Answer the question. + How far is it from your house to T: Corrects mistakes. school? + How far is it from Thanh Phat to Son Duong town? + How far is it from your house to the market? 3. 2 Presentation: (9’) T: Asks Ss to repeat the way of asking * Structure: about distance. + Ask and answer about distance: Ss: Repeat. + How far is it from…..to……? - It’s about …..kilometer(s)/metter(s). Ex: A: How far is it from your house to school? B: It’s about 500 metters. T: Asks Ss some questions. EX: Ss: Answer to the reacher. T: How far is it from Ha Noi to Thai Nguyen? S1: It’s about 80 kilometters. T: Reads the dialogue once and gives * Vocabulary: vocabulary. - coach(n).

(135) Ss: Listen and write down. 3.3 Practice: (18’) T: Reads the dialogue twice. 1. Read the dialogue: Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects pronunciation. T: Calls some Ss to asking about Ex: distance S1: How far is it from your house to Ss: Practise. school? T: Helps Ss to practise. S2: It’s about 2 kiometers T: Asks Ss to look at the map. 2.Look at the table of distance. Ss: Look at the map. Practise asking and answering T: Hangs the sub-board with cities and distance: distances. Ex: Ss: Look at the table. S1: How far is it from Vinh to Ha T: Asks Ss to ask and answer about Noi? distance in pair. S1: It’s about 319 kilometters. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pair. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “asking and answering about distance” - How far is it from…….to……? - It’s about……….metter(s)/kilometer(s). Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise asking the distance again. - Do exercises 2 /P48 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 8. Places : B. 1. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(136) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./ 12/ 2011. Period: 48. UNIT 8: PLACES B. 1,4,5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to get to know the way of giving the requirement and ask about the price at the post office. Listen comprehension the dialogue at the post office to get information about price. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop reading and speaking skill 3. Attitude: Love sending athe letters, like talking about the way of sending a letter to abroad , study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Ask and answer about distance from your house to market/school/post office: * Key: + How far is it from your house to …..? - It’s about …….metter(s)/kilometter(s). 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue question: Ss: Answer the question. + What do you usually do at the post T: Corrects mistakes. office? + Have you ever written a letter to your friends? + How do you send the letter to your friend? Where do you send it? + Do you have a abroad friend?.

(137) + Do you think we send a letter to abroad same as in local? 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss look at the picture and presents content of the dialogue. Ss: Look at the picture and listen to the teacher. T: Reads the dialogue and presents * Vocabulary: vocabulary. - envelope(n) - need(v) Ss: Listen and write down. - altogether - cost(v) T: Guides Ss to read the words. - change(n) - receive(v) Ss: Practise. - Writing pad: giấy viết thư - a phone card: Thẻ điện thoại - stamp: tem - envelope: phong bì T: Presents structures. * Structure: Ss: Listen and write down + The offer sentence: + I would like to…../need to do sth. or I would like sth / need something. EX: I would like to send a letter to the USA. - I would like to buy some stamps. - I would like some stamps. = I need some stamps. or I would like some stamps / envelopes. - I need some stamps/envelopes. * Ask and answer price(cost): How much is/are…? - It is ……… - They are…… Ex: + How much is this book? It’s 3000 dong. + How much are these envelopes? They are 2.500 dong. 3.3 Practice: (17’) T: Reads the dialogue twice. 1. Read the dialogue and answer the.

(138) Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects pronunciation. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue again and the questions and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pair. Ss: Practise. T: Listens corrects mistakes and gives key.. T: Presents content of the listening. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Answer. T: Reads the passage twice and asks Ss to write the price of each item in group of six. Ss: Listen and write the price of each item in group of six. T: Checks the result. Ss: Read the result. T: Reads the passage one more time, corrects and gives key. Ss:Write the answers down notebook. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and answer in pair. Ss: Works in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects mistakes and. questions:. * Key: a. Liz will mail the letter to the USA. b. She pays 11,500 dong altogether. c. She receives 3,500 dong in change. d, e. Students’ answers. 2. Listen and write the price of each of these five items: * Cue questions: + What is the total cost? + How much change will Mrs. Robinson have from 60,000 dong?. * Key: + The total cost is 59,000 dong. + She will have 1,000 dong in change. 3. Answer the questions:. * Key:.

(139) gives key.. a. It is 1,000 dong to mail a local letter in Viet Nam. b. It is 9.500 dong. c. It sells pens, notebooks, chalks… d. Students’ answer.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “talk about the way of sending a letter to abroad, ask and answer about the price” - How much………….? - It’s ……………dong. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise asking the price again. - Do exercises 1, 2 /P50,51 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 8. Places : B. 2, 3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 49 7A:…./12/ 2011 UNIT 8: PLACES. B. 2, 3 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the dialogue between Hoa and Nga, ask and answer about price some things at the post office. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love going to the post office, ask and answer about the price of some things at the post office, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’).

(140) 7A:……../ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Ask and answers: + How much does a letter send to USA? + How much does Liz pay altogether? * Key: - It’s 9,000 dong. - She pays 11,500 dong. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic : “means of * Network: communication”. Telephone Ss: Write the words. T: Gives the remarks.. Content. mobile phone means of communication. letter 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Presents the situaion of the dialogue. Ss: Look at the picture and listen to the teacher. T: Reads the dialogue and presents * Vocabulary: vocabulary. - phone card (n) - overseas(n) Ss: Listen and write down. - regularly (adv) - mail(v) T: Guides Ss to read the words. - phone (v) Ss: Practise. T: Asks Ss to repeat the structure * Structure(Review): about “ need, would like to….” + The offer sentence: + I would like to…../need to do sth. or I would like sth / need something. * Ask and answer price(cost): How much is/are…….? - It is ……… - They are………… 3.3 Practice: (17’) T: Reads the dialogue one more time. 1. Read the dialogue and answer the Ss: Listen and repeat. questions:.

(141) T: Calls Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Practise. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue again and the questions and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pair. Ss: Practise. T: Listens corrects mistakes and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to read and complete the dialogue and use the words in the box in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Corrects mistakes and gives key.. * Answer the questions:. * Key: a. Hoa needs local stamps and some stamps for oversea mail and a post card. b. She needs stamps for oversea mail because she has a pencil in America. c. She needs a phonecard to call (phone) her parents( once a week). 2. Complete the dialogue. Then make up similar dialogues; use the words in the box:. * Key: Hoa: ………like…….. Clerk:………are…….. Hoa:………….much………. Clerk:……….is………….. Hoa:………….Her……… Clerk:………………….change.. T: Calls some pairs to make the same dialogue. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “read comprehension the dialogue between Hoa and Nga, ask and answer about the price some things at the post office” - How much………….? - It’s ……………dong..

(142) Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (2’) - Practise the dialogue again. - Do exercises 2 /P51,52 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 8. Places : B. 4, 5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ...... Teaching date: 7A:…./12/ 2011. Period: 50. REVISION 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review, consolidate the knowledge learned in Unit 1, Unit 2. Apply the knowledge learned to do exercises. + Language focus: - greetings, askand answer about personal information. - Talk about distances: How far isit from….. to …….? - It’s about………metter(s)/kilometer(s). - What’s your telephone number? - order numbers: first, second……… - What’s your date of birth? 2. Skill: To develop writing, speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Review seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, workbook. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (15’) Test: 15 munites. * Requirement: Write the questions answers with distances from Tuyen Quang to: + Thai Nguyen : 80 km + Ha Noi : 120 km.

(143) + Ha Giang : 200km + Ho chi Minh City : 1.846 km + Bac Kan : 200 km * Key: - How far is it from Tuyen Quang to Thai Nguyen? It’s about 80 kilometers. - How far is it from Tuyen Quang to Ha Noi? It’s about 120 kilometers. - How far is it from Tuyen Quang to Ha Giang? It’s about 200 kilometers. - How far is it from Tuyen Quang to Ho Chi Minh City? It’s about 1. 846 kilometers. - How far is it from Tuyen Quang to Bac Kan? It’s about 200 kilometers. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: Goodevening (4’) Goodmorning T: Gives a topic “ Greetings”. Ss: Write the words. Greetings T: Remarks. Nice to meet you Nice to see you 3. 2 Activity 1: ( 3’) 1. Greetings: T: Asks Ss to repeat the greetings. - Nice to see you again. Ss: Repeat. - Nice to meet you. 3.3. Activity 2: 2. Personal Information: (7’) T: Calls Ss to present about My name is………I am in class…… themselves. + Name: Ss: Say. - What’s your family name? It’s………. ( My family name is…) –What’s your middle name? My middle name is……… - What’s your full name? My full name is……………. + Age: How old are you? – I’m …..years old. + Address: Where do you live? - I live……… + Telephone number:.

(144) What’s your telephone number? Exercise 5(P.7). T: Asks Ss to complete the sentences with the words in the box. Ss: Complete the sentences. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives the key.. 3.4. Activity 3: T: Asks Ss to talk about distance. Ss: Repeat. 3.5. Activity 4: T: Asks Ss to make arrangement. Ss: Repeat.. T: Asks Ss to complete the sentences with the words in the box. Ss: Complete the sentences. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives the key.. 4. Consolidation: (4’). (3’). (7’). * Key: a. My name is……. b. I’m eleven years old. c. I live in ……. d.It’s about…..kilometer(s)/meter(s). e. I go to school by bike/on foot. f. I live with my parents and brother. 3. Distances: - How far is it from…..to………..? It’s about…metter(s)/kilometer(s) 4. Making arrangement ( future simple): + Will/ Shall + S + V? Ex: Will you be free tomorrow evening? + Date of birth: I will/Shall be 14 on my next birthday - What’s your date of birth? It’s on June eighth. Exercise 3(P. 9):. * Key: a. will get b. will….come… c. will…….call…….will be…. d. will be…. e. will……go…...

(145) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “review and consolidate the knowledge learned in Unit 1+ Unit 2. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Do exercises in workbook in Unit 1, Unit 2. - Prepare: Review Unit 3, Unit 4, Unit 5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./12/ 2011. Period: 51. REVISION 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review and consolidate the knowledge learned in Unit 3, Unit 4 and Unit 5. Apply the knowledge learned to do exercises. * Language focus: +Exclamations: complaints, complements.. +Is there a……….? - Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t. + Are there any….? - Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t. +Prepositions: on, in, under, near, next to , behind, in front of. + Jobs: What does he/she do?/ Where does he/ she work? + Comperative/ superlative. + Time: What time is it? + Present progressive tense. + Subjects: - What do you study in………? - What does he/she learn in….? - What’s your favourite subject? 2. Skill: To develop writing, speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Review seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, workbook, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure :.

(146) 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 11 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + What’s your name? + What’s your middle name? + What’s your full name? + What’s your family name? * Key: - My name is …………. - My middle name is ………………… - My full name is……………………….. - My family name is……. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss to change adjectives into * Change the adjectives into comparative and superlative (use subcomparative and superlative: board). Adjectives Ss: Write the words. 1. Tall taller the tallest T: Gives remarks. 2. big bigger the biggest 3. bad worse the worst 4. small smaller the smallest 5. expensive more expensive the most expensive 6.beautiful more beautiful the most most beautiful. (4’) 3. 2. Activity 1: 1. Exclamations: T: Asks Ss to repeat the exclamations. - Complements: Ss: Repeat. Ex: + What a beautiful girl! + What a lovely day! - Complaint ments: Ex: + What an awful day? + What a dirty floor! (4’) 2. Is there…..?/ Are there…..?: 3. 3. Activity 2: T: Asks Ss to repeat the use of “ is Ex: there….?, Are there……?” + Is there a table in the room? - Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t..

(147) 3. 4. Activity 3: T: Asks Ss to repeat job. Ss: Repeat.. 3. 5. Activity 4: T: Asks Ss to talk about comparative and superlative. Ss: Repeat.. (5’). (7’). T: Asks Ss to complete the sentences. Ss: Complete the sentences. T: Calls Ss to write the completed sentences. Ss: Write the answers.. T: Corrects and gives key.. 3. 6. Activity 5:. (2’). + Are there any pictures on the wall? - Yes, there are./ No, there aren’t. 3. Ask about job: Ex: + What does he/she do? He/She is a (doctor). + Where does he/she work? - He works in a hospital. 4. Comparative and superlative: + Comparative: - Short adjective: adj + er + (than) Ex: tall taller big bigger bad worse good better - Long adjective: more + adj + than Ex: beautiful more beutiful + Superlative: - Short adj: The + adj + est. Ex: tall the tallest big the biggest - Long adjective : the most + adj Ex: beautiful the most beautiful Exercise 1: Complete the sentences, using comparative and superlative: 1. Hoa is …….than Lan. (tall) 2. The Nile River is …in the world. ( long) 3. Cars are…….bicycle.( fast) 4. Houses in the city are…..houses in the country.( expensive) 5. Ho Chi Minh City is…….Da Nang (big) 6. The USA is .........England. (large) * Key: 1. taller 4. more expensive 2. the longest 5. bigger 3. faster 6. larger 5. Time:.

(148) T: Asks Ss to ask about time. Ss: Repeat.. 3. 7. Activity 6: T: Asks Ss to repeat the use of present progressive tense. Ss: Repeat.. (5’). T: Asks Ss to complete the passage, use the present progressive tense. Ss: Complete the passage. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives the key.. 3. 8. Activity 7: T: Asks Ss to repeat the subjects. Ss: Repeat.. (3’). - What time is it? It’s 7 o’clock. It’s half past seven. It’s aquarter to seven. 6. Present progressive tense: + am/is/are + S + V-ing? Ex: + Is he listening to Music? Yes, he is./ No, he isn’t. + Are they playing soccer? Yes, they are./ No, they aren’t. Exercise 4(P. 23):. * Key: a. …am calling…. f. drinking…. b. ….are making….. g. are listening…. c. ….are laughing…. h. are coming…. d. ….talking i. leaving….. e. …..are eating….. k. Are you listening? l. …..is ringing m. am leaving….. 7. Subjects: + What do you study in physics? - I study about experiments. + What does he learn in Geograhpy? - He learns about the countries and their people. + What’s your favourite subject? - My favourite subject is Math.. 4. Consolidation: (3’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “review and consolidate the knowledge learned in Unit 3+ Unit 4..

(149) Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Do exercises in workbook in Unit 3+ Unit 4. - Prepare: Review Unit 5+ Unit 6. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./12/2011. Period: 52. REVISION 3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review and consolidate the knowledge learned in Unit 6, Unit 7 and Unit 8. Apply the knowledge learned to do exercises. + Language focus: + What do you usually do at recess? + Adverbs of frequency. + Let’s………./ Would you like…….? + a few/fewer/more/ less. + Asking the way: - Could you show me the way to ……..? - Could you tell me how to get there? + Prepositions: on, opisite, between ….and….. + Distance: How far is it from…..to……? - It’s about …..kilometer(s)/meter(s). + Would you like to……? + How much is it? - It’s……….. 2. Skill: To develop writing, speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Review seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, workbook. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………….

(150) 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + What subjects do you like? + What do you study in Music? + How often do you play soccer? * Key: - I like Math. - I learn to sing songs. - I sometimes play soccer. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (4’) T: Asks Ss to answer the questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answr the questions. + Could you show methe way to the T: Gives remarks. market/the post office? + What does your father do? + Where does he work? 3. 2. Activvity 1: (5’) 1. Adverb of frequency: always, T: Calls Ss to repeat adverb of usually, often, sometimes, never frequency. Ex: What do you do at recess? Ss: Say. I sometimes play soccer. I never go to the city. T: Asks Ss to write the answers. Exercise 2(P. 33) Rewrite the Ss: Write the answers. answers. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. * Key: T: Corrects and gives the key. a. Ba is always interested in stamps.. 3.3. Activity 2: T: Asks Ss to repeat the way of using “Let’s” 3.4. Activity 3: T: Asks Ss to repeat invitation.. (2’). (3’). b. Nga often rehearses a play her friends. c. Nga never plays video games. d. Nam, Ba, and Hoa are never late for their class. 2. Let’s: Ex: + Let’s go swimming. + Let’s do the homework. 3. Invitation: + Would you like to come to my house for lunch?.

(151) Ss: Repeat.. T: Asks Ss to repeat contents of review. Ss: Repeat. 3.5. Activity 4: T: Asks Ss to repeat the use of afew/fewer/more/less. Ss: Repeat.. 3.6. Activity 5: T: Calls Ss to repeat the showing the way. Ss: Repeat.. - Yes, I’d love. - I’d love to, but I’m going to a birthday party on Sunday.. (3’). (2’). 3.7. Activity 6: T: Asks Ss to repeat Prepositions. Ss: Repeat.. (3’). 3.8. Activity 7: T: Asks Ss to repeat the way talking about distance. Ss: Repeat. 3.9. Activity 8: T: Asks Ssto repeat the use of need. ss: Repeat.. (2’). 3.10. Activity 9: T: Asks Ss to repeat about price. Ss: Repeat. T: Asks Ss to complete the sentences.. (6’). (4’). 4. Fewer/fewer/more/less: + a few: - I have a few books. + fewer: - Hoa works fewer hours than Lan. + More: - The city is getting more beautiful. 5. Asking the way: + Could you show me the way to the post office? + Could you tell me how to get there? - Go straight ahead. Turn lelf…… 6. Prepositions: on, opisite, between ….and….. Ex: + There is the book on the table. + The bank is opposite the school. 7. Distance: + How far is it from Ha Noi to Tuyen Quang? - It’s about 120 kilometers. 8. Need something / need to do something/would you like to….: + need something: Ex: I need some stamps. + need to do something: Ex: I need to buy a phone card. + Would like to……. Ex: I would like to buy some stamps. 9. Price: + How much is phone card? It’s fifty thousand dong. Exercise 1: Complete the sentences:.

(152) Ss: Complete the sentences. T: Calls Ss to write the completed sentences. Ss: Write the answers. T: Corrects and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to match the words and phrases into the meaningful sentences. Ss: Match. T: Corrects the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Listens and gives key.. * Key: a. How much……….stamp? b. …..are…………stamps? c. …..much is the postcard? It’s one thousand five hundred dong. Exercise 3(P.25):. * Key: + Where can you get newspapers at school? - In a library. + How do you travel to school? - By bicycle. + What do students do in the library? - They read books. + When do you do your homework? - After dinner. + How far is it from your house to school? - About 200 meters. + How long does it take from your house to school? - About 10 munites.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “review and consolidate the knowledge learned in Unit 7+ Unit 8. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Home work: (1’) - Do exercises in workbook in Unit 7+ Unit 8. - Prepare: Do the first tearm written test. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy:.

(153) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: 7A:…./ 12/ 2011. Period: 53. THE FIRST TERM WRITTEN TEST. Thi theo đề của phòng giáo dục ra.. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: 7A:…../ 01/ 2012. Period: 54. CORRECT THE FIRST TERM WRITTEN TEST. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to correct the mistakes in the first term written test. 2. Skill: To develop listening, speaking ,writing and reading skill. 3. Attitude: study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Papers, key. 2. Students’: notebook, pen. III. Procedure :.

(154) 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……./17. out:…………………. 2. Correct the first term written test: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 2.1 Warm up: (4’) T: Asks some questions: * Questions: Ss: Answer the teacher.. + How are you? + What’s the date to day? + Have you done the test well? 2. 2 Task 1: (5’) Question I: T: Reads the passage once again. Ss: Read the sentences, listen and check. T: Calls Ss to read the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Reads the passage last time and * Key: gives the key. 1. F 2. T 3. T 4. F Ss: Listen and check. 2. 3 Task 2: (8’) Question II: T: Calls Ss to read the passage. * True (T) or false (F): Ss: Read the passage aloud. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. * Key: T: Corrects and gives the key. 1.T 2. F 3.F 4.T 2. 4 Task 3: T: Calls Ss to read the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Gives key and explains. Ss: Listen and write down.. (7’). 2. 5 Task 4: T: Asks Ss to read the words and give the compound words. Ss: Read the compound words. T: Corrects and gives key.. (6’). Question III:. * Key: 1. A 2. B 5. C 6. D Question IV :. * Key:. 1+c 4+a. 3. B 7. D. 2+e 5+b. 4. C 8. A. 3+f 6+d.

(155) 2. 6 Task 5: T: Calls Ss to write the sentences on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects mistakes and gives the key.. (9’). Question V:. * Key: 1. Would you like to go to the movie with me tonight? 2. What does Lan usually do after school? 3. Hoa would like to buy some postcards. 4. He is listening to the radio now. 5. How much does a local stamp cost?. 3. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. Correct mistakes in the first term written test. Ss: Listen and say again. 4. Homework: (1’) - Prepare: Unit 9: At home and away - A 1. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./01/ 2012. Period: 55. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY A. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to retell, talk about events happened in the past, retell experiments( things happened). 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop the listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the holidays, like retelling the recent vacation, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook..

(156) III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: - No check the old lesson . 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + Do you like travel or not? T: Gives the remarks. + Where do you usually go in the summer holiday? + What do you do? + What do you buy? 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. - Do you know Nha Trang? - Do you know the sights of Nha Trang? T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and present the dialogue: You’ll listen to the dialogue between Ba and Liz talked about Liz’s vacation in Nha Trang. Ss: Look at the picture and listen to the teacher. T: Presents vocabulary. * Vocabulary: Ss: Listen and write down. - friendly(adj) - trip(n) T: Guides Ss to practise the words. - food(n) - tired(adj) Ss: Practise the words. - gift(n) T: Presents the structures. * Structures: + The past simple tense: Use: We use the past simple tense to talk events in the past. Retell experiments. * Irregularly - verbs: - buy bought.

(157) - be was/were Ex: I was a student last year. She bought a new bike yesterday. ? Did you do the homework last night? - Yes, I did. - No, I didn’t. ? Was she tired yesterday? - Yes, she was./ No, she wasn’t. 3.3 Practice: (22’) T: Reads the dialogue twice. 1. Practice the dialogue: Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practse. T: Listens and corrects mistakes pronunciation. T: Asks Ss the questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + Which places did Liz’s family visit? + What did they do? T: Corrects and gives key. * Cue answers: + Liz’s family visited Cham temple, Tri Nguyen Aquarium. + They bought a lot of different gifts for her friends in America. T: Asks Ss to read again the dialogue 7’ 2. Answer. Number the sentences: and the sentences. Then rearrange the order in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Listens, corrects mistakes and gives * Key: key. (3) Liz bought sourvenirs. (2) Liz visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium. (4) Liz returned to Ha Noi. (1) Liz went to Nha Trang. (5) Liz talked to Ba about her.

(158) vacation. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “retell, talk about events happened in the past, retell experiments”- Past simple tense. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Translate the dialogue into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 1 /P.53 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 9. At home and away : A. 2, 3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./ 01/ 2012. Period: 56. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY A. 2, 3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the text and retell the story of Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen Aquarium, listen comprehension the sentences about Liz’s family’s trip. 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop the listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the holidays, like retelling the trips, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…../ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + Where did Liz go? + What did Liz visit? + What did she buy? * Key: - Liz went to Nha Trang. - Liz visited Cham temple and Tri Nguyen Aquarium..

(159) - She bought a lot of different gifts for her friend in America. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss to write the answers for * Cue questions: the questions. + Was she a student 5 years ago? Ss: Write the answers. + Did you go to school late this mornimg? + Were they football players?? T: Corrects and gives key. * Key: - Yes, she was/ No, she wasn’t. - Yes, I did./ No, I didn’t. - Yes, they were./ No, they weren’t. 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Reads the text once. Ss: Listen. T: Presents vocabulary. * Vocabulary: Ss: Listen and write down. - shark (n) - colorful (adj) T: Guides Ss to practise the words. - dolphin (n) - exit Ss: Practise. - turtle (n) - to wear (v) - type - poster (n) - noodles (n) - crab (n) - instead (of) - cap (n) - to put sth on T: Presents the structures. * Structures: Ss: Repeat the use of the past simple + The past simple tense: tense, listen and write down. Use: We use the past simple tense to talk events in the past. Retell experiments. Ex: Mr. Robinson returned to Ha Noi by train. Mr. Robinson bought Liz a cap. * Irregularly verbs - buy bought - see saw - be was/were - go went - think thought.

(160) * Regularly verbs: V + ed - visit visited - return returned - stop stopped 3.3 Practice: T: Calls Ss to read the text. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find the answers in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practse. T: Listens, corrects and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and retell the story of Liz’s family to Tri Nguyen Aquarium. Ss: Retell the story. T: Helps Ss to retell the story.. (19’) 1. Read the text and answer the questions:. * Key: a. Her parents went to the aquarium with her. b. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles, and many different type of fish. c. They bought a cap and a poster. d. Yes, she did. Liz wore the cap all day. e. Yes, they atefish and crab. f. Because she rememberedthe beautiful fish in the aquarium. 2. Tell the story of Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen Aquarium: Pa. The Robinson family went to the aquarium. Pb. They saw sharks, dolphins, turtles, and many colorful fish. Pc. There was a souvenir shop near the exit of the aquarium. Pd. Mr. Robinson bought Liz a cap with a picture of a dolphin on it. Mrs. Robinsoon bought a poster. Pe. After their visit to the aquarium, the Robinsons went to a food stall. Mr. and Mrs. Robinson ate fish and crab, Liz ate noodles..

(161) T: Asks Ss to read the sentences. 3. Listen. Write the letter of the Ss: Read the sentences. sentences you hear: T: Reads the text twice and asks Ss to 5’ listen and write the letter of the sentences they hear in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss : Read the answers. T: Gives the key by sub-board. * Key: b; d; e; h; j. Ss: Compare and corrects. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “read comprehension the text and retell the story of Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen Aquarium. and listen comprehension about the trip”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Retell the story of Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen Aquarium. - Do exercise 2, 3 /P.54 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 9. At home and away : A. 4, 5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./01/ 2012. Period: 57. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY A. 4, 5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension content of Ba’s diary write their diary, and make these sentences true. 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the diary, writeing the diary, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’).

(162) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + How did the Robinson returned to Ha Noi? + How many times did Liz see the paddies? + Who bought the food for Liz? + When did they arrived arrived home? * Key: - They returned to Ha Noi by bus. - She saw the paddies the first time. - Mrs. Robinson bought some food for Liz. - They arrived home in the evening. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss to change the verbs into * Change the verbs into the past: the past. Ss: Write the words. T: Corrects and gives key. Verbs Key + returne returned + be was/ were + go went + see saw + arrive arrived + buy bought + stop stopped 3. 2 Presentation: (9’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Look at the book and answer. + What is it? T: Reads Ba’s diary once. + Is it a letter? Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Presents vocabulary. * Vocabulary: Ss: Listen and write down. - to move (v) - to receive (v) T: Guides Ss to practise the words. - to miss (v) - aunt (n) Ss: Practise. - to keep in touch (phra) 3.3 Practice: (18’) T: Calls Ss to read the diary. 1. Read the diary: Ss: Read aloud..

(163) T: Corrects mistakes if any. T: Guides Ss to correct mistakes and asks Ss to read the text and check the sentences a - f, Which details are false and compare it with the content of the diary in group of six Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers T: Uses the sub-board to give the key.. 2. Make these sentences true:. * Key: a. Liz lived next door to Ba. b. Liz learned Vietnamese in Viet Nam. c. Ba collects the stamps. d. Liz’s aunt lives in New York. e. The Robinson lived to the otherside of Ha Noi. f. The Robinson moved. Now Ba is sad.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “read comprehension Ba’s diary, correct the mistakes the sentences”. Calls Ss to read the sentences in part 5 . Ss: Listen and say again and read the sentences aloud. 5. Homework: (2’) - Translate the diary into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 4, 5 /P.55 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 9. At home and away : B.1, 2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…../ 01/ 2012. Period: 58. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY B. 1, 2.

(164) I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the dialogue between Lan and Hoa. Tell about things happened in the past. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love friends, dresses, and hair, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + Who lived next door to Ba? + Where did Liz learn Vietnamese? + Who collect stamps? + Where did the Robinson move to? * Key: - Liz lived next door to Ba. - Liz learned Vietnamese in Viet Nam. - Ba colects stamps. - The Robinson moved to the other side of Ha Noi. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the question. * Cue question: Ss: Answer the question. T: What did you do yesterday? S1: I watched TV last night. S2: I read book. T: Gives the remarks. S3: I did my homework. S4:………………………… 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss to look at the picture in the book and presents it. Ss: Look at the picture and listen. T: Plays the tape ( or reads the dialogue) once..

(165) Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise. T: Presents structure. Ss: listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to practise the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise . T: Corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read again the dialogue and find information to answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Answer. T: Corrects and gives key.. T: Guides Ss to practise, using the short answers in pair. Ss: Works in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and gives the key.. * Vocabulary: - hair dresser (n) - clever (adj) - neighbor (n) - woman (n) - material (n) - dressmaker (n) * Structure: - The past simple tense: Tell about things happened in the past. Ex: She bought a new dress. They watched TV last night. - Question: ( short answer) + Did she buy a new dress? Yes, she did./ No, she didn’t. + Did you write a letter? Yes, I did./ No, I didn’t. (18’) 1. Practise the dialogue and answer the questions:. * Key: a. She’s a hairdresser. b. She’s a dressmaker. 2. Answer. Use short answers:. * Key: a. No, she didn’t..

(166) b. No, she didn’t. c. Yes, she did. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “read comprehension the dialogue between Lan and Hoa, ask and answer using the short answers” . Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Practise reading the dialogue again. - Do exercise 1, 2 /P.55-56 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 9. At home and away : B.3, 4. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…../ 01/ 2012. Period: 59. UNIT 9: AT HOME AND AWAY B. 3, 4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the passage about Hoa, ask and answer the questions about the passage. Tell about things happened in the past. 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop the writing and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love making the dresses, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + Did Hoa’s uncle cut her hair? + Who did it? + What does her aunt do? + Did Hoa buy dress?.

(167) + Who made it? + What does Mrs. Mai do? * Key: - No, she didn’t. - Hoa’s aunt cut it. - She is a hairdresser. - No, she didn’t. - Mrs. Mai made it. - She is a dressmaker. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Answer the questions.. T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the picture in the book and presents content of the text: Hoa learned to use a sewing machine and she made a cushion for her armchair and she made a skirt and how her result is. We will read the text. Ss: Look at the picture and listen to the teacher. T: Reads the text once and presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise. T: Presents structure. Ss: listen and write down.. Content * Cue question: + Were you a farmer? + Did you play soccer? + Did she watch TV? + Did you write a letter? + Did they go to bed early? + What did you do yesterday morning? + What did you do last night? …………………………………. (8’). * Vocabulary: - hobby (n) - skirt(n) - sewing machine (n) - decide (v) - cushion (n) * Structure: - The past simple tense: Tell about.

(168) things happened in the past. + Irregular verbs: - think thought - make made + Regulary verbs: - watch watched - decide decided - help helped * Note: Verbs the end by “y” change “y” into “i” add “ed” Ex: try tried fly flied. T: Gives some the way of changing of the verbs. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to read the text and find verbs in the past. Ss: Find the words. T: Calls some Ss to read the text. Ss: Read aloud . T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read again the text and find information to answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Answer. T: Corrects and gives key.. (20’) * Some verbs in the past: watched, thought, was, bought, leared, tried… 1. Practise readingf the text and answer the questions:. * Key: a. She learned to use a sewing machine. b. She made a cushion for her armchair first. c. It was blue and white. d. Next she made a skirt. e. It was green with white flowers on it. f. It looked very pretty. g. She tried it on but it didn’t fit. h. Hoa’s neighbor helped her. i. Finally, it fitted very well..

(169) T: Uses sub-board to present the text about Hoa. Ss: Look at the sub-board and listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss to read the text and use the past form of verbs in the right column to complete the sentences in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Gives the key and asks Ss to exchange the answers. Ss: Exchange and compare the answers. T: Calls Ss to read the text again. Ss: Read aloud.. 2. Wrire. Put the verbs in brackets in the simple past tense:. 7’. * Key: Hoa watched her neighbor make her dress. First, She bought some material. Then, She cut the dress out. Next, she used asewing machine to sew the dress. Hoa decided that sewing was a useful hobby. She made a cushion and a dress. They cushion was fine, but the dress wasn’t. Then, her neighbor helped her, so finally it fitted her.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “read comprehension the text about Hoa, ask and answer the questions in the text, complete the text with the verbs in the past” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Translate the text into Vietnamese. - Do exercises 3, 4 /P.56-57 in workbook. - Prepare: Languege focus 3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 60.

(170) 7A:…./ 01/ 2012. LANGUAGE FOCUS 3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to consolidate vocabulary, structures and review the knowledge learned from Unit 7 to Unit 9. 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop the writing speak skill. 3. Attitude: Study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(4’) * Requirement: Answer the questions about Hoa: + What did she make first? + What color was it? + What did she make next? * Key: - First, she made a cushion for her armchair. - It was blue and white. - Next, she made a skirt. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Cue words: T: Gives some cue words. + An apple (2.500 dong) Ss: Write questions and answers. + An dress (15.000) T: Corrrects mistakes and gives marks. Key: + How much is an apple? It is 2.500 dong. + How much is a dress? It is 15.000 dong. 3. 2 Activity 1: (8’) 1. How much is it? T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and a. Read the dialogue: practise the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs..

(171) Ss: Practise. T: Asks Ss to read information in the box and make the same dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Guides Ss to practise the dialogue. T: Calls some pairs. Ss: Practise before the class. T: Listens and corrects mistakes.. 3. 3 Activity 2: T: Asks Ss to repeat the prepositions. Ss: Repeat.. T: Asks Ss to look at the map and write sentences using the prepositions. Ss: Look at the map and write the sentences. T: calls some Ss to write the sentences on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to repeat the way of asking the distance. Ss: Repeat. T: Calls some pairs to read the. b. Make the same dialogues:. (6’). Ex: S1: How much is the blue hat? S2: It’s 15.000 dong. S1: What about a yellow hat? S2: It’s 12.000 dong. 2. Prepositions: a. Look at the map. Write the location of each store. + Prepositions: near, beside/ next to, opposite, to the right, between, to the left.. * Key: 1. The shoe store is on Hai Ba Trung street. It’s next to/ near the clothing store to the left. 2. The bookstore is on Hue street. It’s between the restanrant and minimart. 3. The restaurant is on the Hue street. It’s next to the side book store to the left. 4………… b. Asks and anwer about distance: + How far is it from ……. to……..? It’s ……………………..

(172) dialogue. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to practise in pair with information in the box. Ss: Practise.. 3.4 Activity 3: T: Uses sub-board and calls Ss to change the verbs into the past form. Ss: Change the verbs. T: Corrects and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to read the sentences and complete them using the words in the box in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Corrects and gives key.. 3.4 Activity 4: T: Asks Ss to read Nga’s diary and complete the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and gives key.. (6’). 3’. (5’). Ex: S1: How far is it from the clothing store to the book store? S2: It’s 450 meters. 3. Past simple tense: a. Write the past form of the verbs in the table. * Key: - buy bought - help helped - remember remembered - take took - send sent - think thought - talk talked b. Complete the sentences.. * Key: + I played volleyball last week. + Yesterday, I talked to my grandmother. + Last December, Mom bought me a new bike. + Dad worked in Hue a few years ago. + I sent a letter to my penpal last month. 4. Simple tenses:.

(173) 3.5 Activity 5: T: Asks Ss to compare the things in two refrigerators. Ss: Compare and write the sentences. T: Corrects and gives key.. (5’). * Key: Nga: ………help my mom and study English. Nga:…….cleaned my room, helped my mom, studied English, watched TV, played volleyball and stayed at Hoa’s house. Nga: ……will study English, clean my room, help my mom, se a movie, visit my grandmother and buy new shoes. 5. More, less, and fewer:. * Key: 1. Before, there were four bananas. Now there are fewer bananas. 2. Before, there was 500 ml of orange juice. Now there is more orange juice. 3. Before, there was a lot of milk. Now there is less milk. 4. Before, there were 2 eggs/ not many eggs. Now there are more/ a lot of eggs.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “review and consolidate the knowledge from Unit 7 to Unit 9”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (1’) - Do exercises in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 10. Health and hygiene – A. 1, 2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Ngày………tháng …….năm 2012. Kiểm tra giáo án: …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………….

(174) …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………. Teaching date: 7A:…./02/ 2012. Period: 61. UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE A. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the letter, Hoa’s mother sent to Hoa. Guide/Tell somebody to do thing, talk about personal hygiene and work day, or routines everyday. - Review the present simple tense to talk about routines, work day. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the health and hygiene, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, picture in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: - Checks the exercises 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Cue question: T: Asks Ss the questions. + What do you usually do for yourself Ss: Answer the questions. everyday? + What do you do after getting up? + Do you watch your own clothes? + Do you eat candy? + Do you stay up late? ………………………………… T: Gives the remarks..

(175) 3. 2 Presentation: T: Presents the situation of the letter and helps Ss to remember again character Hoa and talk again what you know about Hoa. Ss: Say about Hoa. T: Reads the letter once and presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise.. (8’). * Vocabulary: - hope (v) - iron(v) - harvest (n) - probably (v) - take care of (phr) - forget (v) - take morning exercises: (phr) - stay up late * Structure: - Present simple tense: talk about activities in the present(review). Ex: We are both fine. Your grand father often works with us. + What does Hoa’s mother want her to do? + What does she want her not to do?. T: Presents structure. Ss: listen and write down. T: Repeats the way of changing of the verbs. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to read the letter and compare with the guessing above. Ss: Compare. T: Calls some Ss to read the letter. Ss: Read aloud . T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to find information in the letter to answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Answer. T: Corrects and gives key.. (20’) 1. Practise reading the letter:. 2. Answer the questions:. * Key: a. They are busy because it is almost harvest time. b. Hoa’s grandfather helps them on the farm..

(176) c. they will go to Ha Noi soon, after the harvest. d. Now Hoa is different. She gets up and does morning exercises everyday. e. Hoa’s mother wants her to do her own washing and iron. - Hoa’s mother doen’t want her to eat too much candy, stay up late. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “read comprehension the letter Hoa’s mother sent to Hoa”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Translate the letter into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 1 /P.61 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 10. Health and hygiene – A.2 * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./ 02/ 2012. Period: 62. UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE A. 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to listen and rearrange the pictures following to order the listening, list Hoa’s personal hygiene and work day. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love the health and hygiene, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, picture in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’).

(177) * Requirement: T: Checks the exercises 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the questions. Ss: Answer the questions.. T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Presents the situation of the letter and helps Ss to remember again character Hoa and talk again what you know about Hoa. Ss: Say about Hoa. T: Reads the letter once and presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise.. (8’). * Vocabulary: - to put on (v): mặc(quần, áo), đeo(giầy) - to polish (v): đánh giầy - to put …in: cho …..vào - to change: (v): thay - paints: quần * Structure: - The past simple tense: Tell about things happened in the past. Ex: - I received a letter from your aunt last week. - She wrote lots about you. + Some verbs: - put on/put on - drink/drank - eat/ate - iron/ironed - change/changed - have/had - polish/polished - do/did. T: Presents structure. Ss: listen and write down. T: Repeats the way of changing of the verbs. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures in. Content * Cue question: + What do you usually do for yourself everyday? + What do you do after getting up? + Do you watch your own clothes? + Do you eat candy? + Do you stay up late? …………………………………. (20’) 1. Listen and put the pictures in the.

(178) the book. Ss: Look at the pictures. T: Presents content of the listening: This is Hoa’s activities and asks Ss to arrange the pictures in the right order. Ss: Listen and arrange. T: Reads the passage twice and asks Ss to listen and arrange in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks and gives the key. Ss: Read the answers. T: Asks Ss to look at the ordered pictures and retell Hoa’s activities everyday. Ss: Say. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to rewrite Hoa’s activities. Ss: Write. T: Guides, helps Ss to write. order you hear:. 6’. * Key: a – e – f – d – g – c – h – b . 2. Rewrite Hoa’s activities inorder to the listening:. Ex: Yesterday, Hoa got up and took a shower. She put on clothes………….. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “ Listen about Hoa’s personal hygiene and work day”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Retell the Hoa’s workday. - Do exercise 2 /P.61 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 10. Health and hygiene – A3, 4. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./ 02/ 2012. Period: 63. UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE.

(179) A. 3, 4 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension Nam’s diary and write about activities everyday and hygiene, complete the letter Hoa’s reply to her mother. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love reading and writing diary about the health and hygiene, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, picture in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:……………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions about Hoa: + Why are Hoa’s parents busy? + When will they go to Ha Noi? + How is Hoa different now? + What does Hoa’s mother want her to do? + What does he want Hoa not to do? * Key:- They are busy because it is almost harvest time. - They will go to Ha Noi after the harvest. - Now Hoa is different she gets up and does morning exercises everyday. - Hoa’s mother wants her to do her own washing and iron. - Hoa’s mother doen’t want her to eat too much candy, stay up late 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities 3.1 Warm up: T: Asks Ss the question. Ss: Answer the question.. T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation:. Time (5’). Content Ex: T: What do you everyday? S1: I get up. I have breakfast. I wash clothes…….. S2: I get up. I wash my face. I brush my teeth……... (8’).

(180) T: Asks Ss to look at the book and asks Ss the question. Ss: Look at the book and answer the question. T: Presents about Nam’s diary and presents activities everyday. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise. T: Presents structure. Ss: listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Uses sub-board with Nam’s diary. Ss: Look and read it. T: Calls some Ss to read the diary. Ss: Read aloud . T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Answer.. T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: ASks Ss to write activities everyday the same as Nam’s diary. Ss: Write activities. T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs.. * Cue questions: + What is this?. * Vocabulary: - comb hair(phr) - shower (n) - eat (v) - lunch (n) - do morning exercises * Structure: + What do you do everyday? - I get up. I do morning exercises…. + What time do you get up/ eat breakfast/ do homework/ go to bed….? - I get up at 6 o’clock. …………………………………… (19’) 1. Practise reading Nam’s diary and then write about yourself the same as Nam: * Cue questions: + What does Nam do everyday? + What time does Nam get up? + What does Nam do at 8.00?. Ex:.

(181) Ss: Practise.. T: Gives Ss to read the letter. Ss: Read the whole letter to get to know meaning and content of the letter. T: Asks Ss to read the letter again and find the appropriate form of verb to fill in the brackets in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Helps Ss to do exercise. Ss: Complete the letter. T: Calls one or two Ss to read the completed letter. Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens, corrects mistakes and gives key.. S1: What do you do everyday? S2: I get up, do morning exercises, have breakfast….. S1: What time do you get up? S2: I get up at six. 2. Complete Hoa’s reply to her mother with suitable verbs: 6’. * Key: Dear Mom, Thanks for your letter. I’m glad to hear you are well. I’m doing fine at school. At first, everything was strange and difficult. Now I am having a lot of fun. I hope you will visit Ha Noi after the harvest. We will show you around the city. Don’t worry about me, Mom. I know how to take care of myself. Everyday, I get up early to take morning exercises, and I never go to bed late. I often wash my clothes and iron them carefully. I am not eating much candy now. I told all of my friends about your visit, and they all hope to see you in Ha Noi . It is 9.30 now, so I must.

(182) go to bed. Take care, Mom. Write again soon. Love, Hoa. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “read comprehension Nam’s diary, write about activities everyday, hygiene” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Practise the activities everyday. - Do exercise 2,3,4 /P.62- 63 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 10. Health and hygiene – B.1, 2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./02/ 2012. Period: 64. UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE B. 1, 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask and answer about hygiene teeth and mouth in the letter. Retell events happened at the dentist’s office. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading and listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love hygiening teeth and mouth, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, picture in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(15’) Test 15’ * Requirement: Question 1: Put the verb in the correct form, using the past simple: 1. My mother……(buy) me a new bag..

(183) 2. I………..(go) to bed late last night. 3. Hoa…….( receive) a letter from her mother yesterday. 4. He………(be) a student last year. 5. You ……(not understand) what I speak. Question 2: Choose the correct verbs to put in the blankets: 1. I……..(stay/ stayed/ will stay) at home yesterday. 2. Hoa…….(live/ lives/ lived) in Hue last year. 3. Her parents……(will visit/ visit/ visited) her after the harvest. 4. Nam ……..(sees/ saw/ will see) me today. 5. They………(have/ had/ will have) breakfast at 7.00. * Key: Question 1. 1. bought 3. received 5. didn’t understand 2. went 4. was Question 2: 1. stayed 3. will visit 5. had 2. lived 4. sees 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer the question. + What will you do if you have a toothache? + What will the dentist do when you T: Gives the remarks. come to the dentist’s office? 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss to look at the book and presents the situation of the dialogue. Ss: Look at the book and listen to the teacher. T: Gives some questions, and read * Cue questions: the the dialogue once. + What is Minh going to do at 10.30? Ss: Listen. + What happened to Hoa last week? + How did the doctor help Hoa? T: Presents vocabulary. * Vocabulary: Ss: Listen and write down - toothache(n) - sound(v) T: Guides Ss to practise the words. -dentist (n) - loud Ss: Practise. - appointment(n) - cavity(n) - scared(adj) - afterward - drill (v) - goodluck.

(184) T: Presents structure. Ss: listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to practise reading the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise . T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Read the answers. T: Listens and corrects mistakes and gives key.. T: Presents content of the passage. Ss: Listen to the passage. T: Reads the passage twice and asks Ss to listen and write the information to answer. Ss: Listen and write. T: Checks some Ss the answers. Ss: Answer.. * Structure: + What is the matter? I have a toothache. + Question “Why” Ex: Why did you go to bed late last night? - Because I have a lot of exercises. (18’) 1. Practise reading the dialogue and answer the questions:. * Key: a. Minh has a toothache. b. No, he doesn’t. The loudness of the drill scares him. c. Becauses he had a toothache. d. She filled the cavity in her teeth. e – f. students’ answers. 2. Listen and answer: * Cue informations: Dr. Lai’s job Dr. Lai’s clothes How. do. children. feel? Dr.Lai help children:. explains………. gives…………… tells……………. reminds toclean...eat... T: Listens, corrects mistakes, and.

(185) gives key.. * Key: a. Dr. Lai is a dentist. b. Dr. Lai (or she) wears uniform to work. c. Most children feel scared when they come to see Dr. Lai. d. She explains what will happen, she gives them advice. She tells them teeth regularly and eat sensible.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “read comprehension the dialogue, ask and answer about hygiene teeth and mouth, retell events happened at dentist’s office”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Translate the dialogue into Vietnamese. - Do exercise 1, 3, 4 /P.63- 64-65 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 10. Health and hygiene – B.3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 65 7A:…./ 02/ 2012 UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE. B. 3,4,5 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the passage, talk about hygiene teeth and mouth. Read and find the correct words to complete the story events happened with Minh at the dentist’s office. - to talk about the teeth and mouth, ask and answer with question “Why? – Because”. Write the poster to take care of your teeth. 2. Skill: Groupwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love hygiening teeth and mouth, study seriously. II. Preparation:.

(186) 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, picture in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Read the dialogue and answer the questions: + What’s the matter Minh? + Does Minh like going to the dentist? * Key: - He has a toothache. - No, she doesn’t. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer the question. + Have you had a toothache? + What did you do with you? + Do you see the dentist? + How did you feel? + What did the dentist do with your T: Gives the remarks. cavity? (7’) 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the book and asks the questions about the text. * Cue questions: Ss: Look at the book and answer. + What is the matter Minh? + How does he feel? + What is the doctor doing? + Why does that happen to Minh? T: Reads the dialogue once. Ss: Listen. T: Presents vocabulary. * Vocabulary: Ss: Listen and write down - surgery(n) - serious(adj) T: Guides Ss to practise the words. - to check (v - to finish(v) Ss: Practise. - to smile (n) T: Presents structures. * Structure: Why – Because: Ss: Listen and write down. Ex:.

(187) 3.3 Practice: T: Reads the passage twice. Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Calls some Ss to read the passage. Ss: Practise reading. T: Listens and corrects mistakes pronunciation. T: Asks Ss to read the passage again and find information fill in the passage in group of six ( use the card) Ss: Work in group of six. T: Gives key by sub-board. Ss: Exchange the cards and compare the answers. T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and using the words under the pictures, ask and answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens, corrects mistakes and gives key.. (12’). S1: Hoa doesn’t do the homework. Why? S2: Because she hasn’t the exercises book. Ex: a, a tooth/ hurt. have / cavity A: Minh’s tooth hurt. Why? B: Because hehas a cavity. 1. Practise reading the passage and complete the story:. 4’. * Key: ….nervous……smiles……….cavity….. bush………pleased. 2. Ask and answer the questions using Why-Because:. * Key: b. Minh is (feels) nervous. Why? Because he’s seeing the dentist. c. The cavity is not serious. Why? Because it’s small. d. Minh looks worried. Why? Because he always forgets to brush his teeth. e. Minh is very happy. Why?.

(188) T: Asks Ss to look at the picures and presents about taking care of the teeth. Ss: Listen. T: Asks Ss to complete the poster in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the sentences. Ss: Write the sentences on the board. T: Corrects and gives key.. Because his teeth are ok. 3. Write. Complete the poster “Take care of Your teeth”: 4’. * Key: Do: - Brush teeth after meals. - Use a brush of toothpaste. - See a dentist. Don’t: - Use an old toothbrush. - eat too much candies.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “read comprehension the text, talk about hygiene teeth and mouth”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (1’) - Learn by heart the passage. - Do exercise 3,4 /P.65 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 11. Keep fit, stay healthy – A. 1. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./ 02/ 2012. Period: 66. UNIT 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY A. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the dialogue, number the sentences. Talk about checking up medial normal. 2. Skill: Pairwork ,groupwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the health, checking the health, study seriously..

(189) II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, picture in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: put the correct form of verb in the brackets. 1. She…..(do) her homework last night. 2. Everyday, Hoa….(get up) early. 3. I……(buy) a new book yesterday. * Key: 1. did 2. gets up 3. bought 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer the question. + What’s the date today? + How are you today? + Who feels tired? + Do you think that you have a problem your health? + Do you check up medial normal? T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and * Cue questions: answer the questions. + Who are they? Ss: Look at the picture and answer. + Where are they? + Do you think what they are doing? T: Reads the introduction and presents content of the dialogue. Ss: Listen. T: Reads the dialogue once and asks * Cue question: Ss some questions. + What do you often check when Ss: Answer. you check-up medial normal? T: Presents vocabulary. * Vocabulary: Ss: Listen and write down. - temprature(n) - to measure.

(190) T: Guides Ss to read the words. Ss: Practise.. - height (n) - to weigh - centimeter (n) - normal - order Ss to practice words * Structure: + Order sb to do sth: Ex: Follow me, please. Sit down, please. + Requirement: Would you+ verb..? EX: + Would you open your mouth, please? + Would you stand here, please? + Would you open the window, please?. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens, corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to find the characters in the dialogue checked things. Ss: Find the things characters checked. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue again once and number the sentences in group of six. ( use the cards). Ss: Work in group of six. T: Gives key. Ss: Exchange the cards, compare the answers and corrects mistakes.. (17’) 1. Practie the dialogue:. -Checked: weight. temprature,. height,. 2. Number the sentences: 5’. * Key: a–6 b–8 c–3. d–2 e–5 f–1. g–4 h–7. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Read comprehension the dialogue and number the sentences. Talk about ckeck the health normally” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Translate the dialogue in Vietnamese. - Do exercise 1 /P.67-68 in workbook..

(191) - Prepare: Unit 11. Keep fit, stay healthy – A.2, 3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./ 02/ 2012. Period: 67. UNIT 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY A. 2, 3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to listen comprehension the dialogue and fill the missing information about checking medical normal. Fill personal information in the medial record. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the listening and speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love the health, checking the health, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, picture in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Read the dialogue and answer the question. + What do you often check when you check up medical normal? * Key: -Check temperature, height, weight. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer the question. + How often do you check up the medial? + What do you check up? + How height are you? + How weight are you?.

(192) + How temperature are you? T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Presents content of the dialogue. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Presents some structures. Ss: Listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Reads the dialogue twice and asks Ss to fill missing information in the dialogue in individual. Ss: Listen and fill in individual. T: Checks the result. Ss: Read the result. T: Gives key. Ss: Compare and correct mistakes. T: Calls some pairs to read the dialogue. Ss: Read aloud.. T: Reads the requirement and guides Ss to practise. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss to ask and answer about the record medical, using the cue questions in the box and information in the records in pair.. (8’). (19’). * Structures: + Temperature: How temperature are you? - It’s 370C. + Height: How height are you? - I am one meter 45 centimeters tall. + Weight: How weight are you? - I am 38 kilos. 1. Listen. Then write the missing words:. * Key: Doctor: ….ask…..How…….. Doctor: …your….50……… Hoa: …..shorter………me…… Doctor: …..tall………… Hoa: …..metter…….centimeters. Doctor:…will……nurse….height… Hoa: …….think……….. Doctor: No……..from………… 2. Asks and answer the questions about the medial record: * Cue questions: + Which ……? + What is his…….? + Where does he………?.

(193) Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise.. T: Listen and corrects mistakes and gives key.. + How…….is he….? Ex: A: What class is he in? What is his surname? B: What is his forename? How old is he ? How height is he? * Key: MEDICAL RECORD School: Nguyen Du School Class: 7A FULL NAME Forenames: Van Kien Surname: Tran Address: 66 Ham Long Street, Ha Noi √ Male Female Age: 12 weight: 41 kg Height: 140 cm. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Listen comprehension the dialogue and fill the missing words in the dialogue. Fill the personal information in the medical record.” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Read the dialogue again. - Do exercise 2, 3, 4 /P.69-70 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 11. Keep fit, stay healthy – B. 1. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:……/ 02/ 2012. Period: 68. UNIT 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY B. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:.

(194) 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask and answer about the health, talk and describe name and sympton of diseas. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the health, checking the health, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, picture in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions. + How old are you? + How tall are you? + How heavy are you? * Key: -I am ….years old. - I am ….meter…..cetimeters tall. - I am ……….. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer the question. + Who was absent yesterday? + Hung was absent? + Why was he absent? + Have you ever been absent? T: Gives the remarks. (9’) 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and explore their knowledge. Ss: Look at the pictures and say. T: Presents pictures: this is Mr. Tan, the teacher and this is Lan, in balloon 1: Lan was not there. She was absent. Ss: Look at the picture and listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss the question. + What do you think Mr. Tan is.

(195) Ss: Answer.. T: Reads the dialogue once and presents words. Ss: listen and write. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects mistakes pronuciation. T: Asks Ss to find information to answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens, corrects and gives key.. (18’). asking Lan? + What was wrong with her? * Vocabulary: - abad cold (n) - virus(n) - a headache (n) - wrong(adj) - weather (n) - problem - a sick note - to be sick * Structures: + Have + name of illness Ex: Have a bad cold.( had a………) Have a headache.( had a……..) Have a toothache.( had a…….) 1. Practice the dialogue:. 2. Answer the questions:. * Key: a. Lan didn’t go to shool yesterday because she had a bad cold. b. She had a headache. c. Mr. Tan told Lan to stay inside at recess. d. The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Read comprehension the dialogue and answer the questions”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Read the dialogue again. - Do exercise 2 /P.72 in workbook..

(196) - Prepare: Unit 11. Keep fit, stay healthy – B. 2, 3. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./02/ 2012. Period: 69. UNIT 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY B. 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to ask and answer about some normal diseases, listen and complete the table about diseases. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the listening andspeaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love the health, like talking about health and deases, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions about Lan. + Where was Lan yesterday? + Why didn’t she go to school? * Key: -Lan was at home( She didn’t go to school). - She didn’t go to school because she had a bad cold and had a headache. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the questions. * Slap the board: Ss: Answer the question. bad sick cold note sick.

(197) virus. toothache T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Presents some diseases in the table (by sub-board). Ss: Look at the sub-board and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise.. (9’) Name. T: Gives some questions. Ss: Answer.. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to ask and answer about diseases in group of four (use the cards). Ss: Work in group of four. T: Checks the group and fill totals in the table. Ss: Read the answer and fill the total. T: Asks some questions to check the answer. Ss: Listen and write down.. (18’). Cold. Flu. Headache. stomatache. Toothache. * Vocabulary: - cold (adj) - flu (adj) - stomachache * Cue questions: + Were you ever absent from school last semester? + Were you sick? + Did you have a cold/ flue..? 1. Take a survey: Name. Cold. Flu. Headache. stomatache. Toothache. * Cue questions: + what was the most common illness? + What was the least common illness?. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. “Ask and answer some normal diseases, listen comprehension the passage and complete the table about diseases”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercise 3 /P.72 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 11. Keep fit, stay healthy – B. 4, 5..

(198) * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Ngày……….tháng………năm 2012. Kiểm tra giáo án: …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: Period: 70 7A:…./02/ 2012 UNIT 11: KEEP FIT, STAY HEALTHY. B. 4, 5 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to get to know about the common cold, ask answer about common cold. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the health, like talking about health and deases( common cold), study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, picture. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions about you. + Were you ever absent from school last semester? + Were you sick? + Did you have a cold/ the flu/ stomachache? * Key: -Yes, I was.( No, I wasn’t)..

(199) - Yes, I was. ( No, I wasn’t). - Yes, I did.( No, I didn’t). 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Networds: T: Gives a topic” diseases” toothache Ss: Write words.. flu T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and presents about content of the text. Ss: Look at the picture and listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss some questions about “common cold”. Ss: Answer.. disease s cold. (10’). T: Reads the text once and presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise the words.. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to read the text silent. Ss: Read the text. T: Calls some Ss to read the text.. headache. (17’). * Cue questions: + What do you know about common cold? + Do you usually have common cold? + What are the symptons of the common cold? + What do you do if you hane common cold? * Vocabulary: - disease (n) - cure(n) - common cold (n) - disappear(v) - sympton(n) - prevent(v) - runny nose(n) - slight fever(n) - coughing(n) - sneezing(n) 1. Practice reading the text:.

(200) Ss: Read the text aloud. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Answer. T: Listens, corrects mistakes and gives key. Ss: Write down.. 2. Answer the questions:. * Key: a. We call the cold” common” because every year million people catched. b. they are a runny nose, a slight fever, coughing, sneezing. c. No, there is no cure for the common cold. d. No, these medicines don’t cure a cold but they relieve the sympton. e. We can prevent a cold by eating well, doing exercise, keeping fit and stay healthy.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Calls Ss to read the poem by holding your nose and read it. Ss: Read aloud. T: Retells the main content of the lesson “talk about common cold”. Ss: Listen and repeat. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercise 4,5 /P.73 in workbook. - Prepare: Do the third written test. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./ 02/ 2012. Period: 71. THE THIRD WRITTEN TEST.

(201) I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Checking the students’ knowledge, vocabulary and grammar from Unit 9 to Unit 11. Ss apply the knowledge learned to do the test. + Vocabulary: past form of verbs. + Grammar: past simple tense, present simple, Would you like, question form(Which, What, Where, How), Why –Because. - Imperatives.. + Listening: Listen about Hoa. + Reading: talk about Ba. + Writing: answer the questions about yourself: Past simple, Present simple,Time for activities, protect teeth, present height(health). 2. Skill: Develop the listening, reading and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love learning English, do the test seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Questionnaire, papers. 2. Students’: Papers, pens. III. Procedure: 1. Organization: (1’) 7A:……/17 out:………….. 2. Test: A. Matrix: Level Standard (Unit 9-11). Apply Realize. Grasp throughly. Low. High. Total. - Listen to the passage about Hoa. Listening (Unit: 10). Sen...: 8 Point: 2. Vocabulary - Past simple. and grammar - Present (Unit:9,10,11) simple. - Would you like… - Question form(Which,. - past form of. verbs.. Sen: 8 Point: 2 Percent: 20 %.

(202) Where, How…: height/temperat ure/weight) - Why – Because.. - Imperatives. Sen: 8 Point: 2. Reading (Unit: 10). Writing (Unit:9,10,11). Sen: 14 Point: 3,5pts Percent:35 %. Sent: 6 Point: 1,5 - Read the dialogue about Ba.. Sen: 4 Point: 2 Percent: 20%. Sen: 4 Point: 2 - Past simple. - Present simple. - Time for activities. - protect teeth. - Present height-health. Sen...: 5 Point: 2,5. Total. Sen: 8 Sen: 18 Sen: 5 Point: 2 Point: 5,5 Point: 2,5 Percent: 20 % Percent: 55 % Percent: 25%. Sen:5 Point: 2,5 Percent:25 % Total Sen: 31 Point: 10 Percent: 100%. B. Questions: Question I: Listen to the passage and put the tick(V) in the correct box for T (True) or F (False) (2 marks): T F 1. Hoa was born in Hue. 2. She lives in Ha Noi with her family. 3. She doesn’t study at Quang Trung school. 4. Yesterday was her thirteenth birthday. 5. She had a big party with her friends 6. Hoa and her friends ate a lot of foods and fruits. 7. The doctor arrived and gave Hoa some advice. 8. She took the medicine and went to bed. Question II. Read conversation and answer the questions (2 marks):.

(203) Ba: Here you are, Hoa. This is present for you. Hoa: Thanks, Ba. What is it? Ba: It’s a pencil box. You can put your pens and pencils in it. Hoa: Did you bike it? Ba: No, I didn’t. I made it yesterday. Hoa: How did I make it? Ba: I made it from a piece of wood. Hoa: Well, It’s very nice. Thank you for making it. Did you take a long time? Ba: No, only a couple of hours. Hoa: You are very patient. Ba: I guess. I like doing wood work. It’s my favorite hobby. * Questions: 1. What did Ba give Hoa? 2. When did he make it? 3. How did he make it? 4. How long did it take Ba to make the box? Question III. Choose the best option (A, B, C, or D) to complete the following sentences (2 marks): 1. Where……you last sunday? A. are B. was C. is D. were 2. she often……. her face twice a day. A. wash B. is washing C. washes D. goes 3. Would you like…..to the movie with me tonight? A. to go B. go C. going D. goes 4. What does Hoa usually ….after school? A. does B. do C. did D. done 5. …….didn’t Minh go to school yesterday? – Because he had a toothache. A. When B. Where C. Why D. What 6. They………sharks, dophins and turtles at Tri Nguyen Aquarium. A. see B. saw C. to see D. seeing 7. …….eat too much candy. A. Do B. Does C. Don’t D. Doesn’t 8. How……is he? – One meter 45 centimeters. A. weight B. height C. high D. heavy Question IV. Change these verbs into the past form (1,5 marks): 1. give …………………… 4. buy ………………… 2. be …………………… 5. visit ………………… 3. see …………………… 6. fill ………………… Question V. Answer the questions about you(2,5 marks): 1. Where did you do yesterday? 2. Did you watch TV last night? 3. What time do you get up? 4. What do you do to take care of your teeth? 5. How height are you?.

(204) C. Answers: Question I: * Tapescript: Hoa was born in Hue, but now she lives in Ha Noi with her aunt and uncle. She went to Ha Noi two years ago. Now she studies at Quang Trung School. Yesterday was her thirdteenth birthday. She had a small party with her friends. They ate a lot of food and fruits and cakes. In the evening Hoa had a stomachache. Her aunt was worried. She called a doctor. The doctor arrived and gave some medicine. She took the medicine and went to bed. Today Hoa feels better. She remembered the things she ate in the party. She tells her friends not to eat a lot of things. * Key : 1.T 2.F 3. F 4.T 5. F 6. T 7. F 8. T Question II: * Answer the questions: 1. Ba gave Hoa a pecil box. 2. He made it yesterday. 3. He made it from a piece of wood. 4. He took a couple of hours. Question III: * Key: 1.D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. B 7.C 8.D Question IV: 1. give gave 4. buy bought 2. be was/ were 5. visit visited 3. see saw 6. fill filled Question V: 1. I stayed at home/ I watched TV….. 2. Yes, I did./ No, I didn’t. 3. I get up at……... 4. I often brush my teeth………. 5. I am………metter…………centimeter. D. Marks: Question I : 2 marks( 0,25 x 8) Question IV : 1 mark (0,25 x 4) Question II : 2 marks( 0,5 x 4) Questin V : 2,5 marks( 0,5 x 5) Question III : 2 marks (0,25 x 8) 3. Consolidation: (3’) T: Hands in the papers -Remarks the test..

(205) 4. Homework: (1’) - Prepare : Unit 12. Let’s eat – A 1,2 * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy:. ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:…./02/ 2012. Period: 72. UNIT 12: LET’S EAT! A. 1, 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk the normal food and talk about favorite food. (hobbies: like, don’t like the food) 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the food, like talking about favorite food, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, picture. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:….../ 17 out:…………………… 2. Check up:(5’) - No check the old lesson, last period did the test. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic “ foods” and “fruit” potato chicken Ss: Write words. foods fish banana. beef orange.

(206) fruit apple T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and presents about content of the text. Ss: Look at the picture and listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Answer.. T: Presents the situation of the story: Yesterday, Hoa and her au nt went to the market. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Gives Ss to guess: What did they buy? Ss: Guess. T: Plays the tape once and presents newwords. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise the words. T: Presents structures. Ss: Listen and write down.. (10’). * Cue questions: + Have you ever gone to the markt? + What foods do you look/ buy in the market?. * Vocabulary: - spinach(n) - neither(n) - cucumber (n) - either(v) - papaya(n) - too(v) - durian(n) - so - ripe(adj) * Structures: + So: (cũng vậy) Use in the positive sentences. Ex: A: I like apple. B: So do I. + Too: (Cũng). Use in the positive sentences. Ex: I like coffee and I like tea, too. A: I like chicken. B: I like chicken, too. (?) Do you like ………?.

(207) - Yes, I like….., too./ Yes, so do I. - No, I don’t like…/ No, I don’t. + Neither: (Cũng không) Use in the negative sentences. Ex: A: I don’t like sports. B: Neither do I. + Either:(Cũng) Use in the negative sentences. Ex: I hate carrots and I don’t like peas, either. + I don’t like beef. Do you like it? - No, I don’t like beef either./ No, neither do I. - Yes, I like beef./ Yes, I do. 3.3 Practice: T: Calls one student to read the present. Ss: Read aloud. T: Reads the dialogues twice. Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogues in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Ask Ss to ask and answer using “So or too” in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Ptactice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes.. T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the questions using “ either, neither” in pair.. (22’) 1. Practice reading the dialogues:. 2. Asks and answer questions with apartner. Talk about the food you like: Ex 1: A: I like pineapples. Do you like them? B: - Yes. I like pineapples, too. - Yes, so do I. - No, I don’t like pineapples. - No, I don’t. Ex 2: A: I don’t like beef. Do you like it? B: No, I don’t like beef either. No, neither do I. Yes, I like beef./ Yes, I do..

(208) Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Talk about their favorite foods and fruit, and talk about hobbies with so, too, either and neither”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Practise the dialogues again. - Do exercises: 2,3,4/p.74,75 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 12. Let’s eat! A. 3,4. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./02/ 2012. Period: 73. UNIT 12: LET’S EAT! A. 3, 4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to describe how to make meals. Wrire the things which you ate and drank at the meals. 2. Skill: Groupwork. To develop the reading and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love cooking the meals, the food. Like talking about the food for meals, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + What did aunt and Hoa buy in the market?.

(209) + What didn’t Hoa like? + What didn’t aunt like? * Key: - Hoa and aunt bought beef, spinach, cucumber and some oranges. - Hoa didn’t like pork, durians. - Aunt didn’t like peas, carrots and durians. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities 3.1 Warm up: T: Asks Ss the questions. Ss: Answer.. T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the picture in the textbook. Ss: Look at the picture and guess the content of the text. T: Presents sthe content of the text and asks Ss to read the text and answer the questions. Ss: Listen and answer. T: Reads the text once and presents newwords. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise the words.. 3.3 Practice: T: Calls some students to read the text. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to read the text and find. Time Content (5’) * Cue questions: + What do you eat for breakfast/ lunch/ dinner? + What do you prepare to cook a meal? + What are they? (8’). * Cue questions: + What did she cook? + How did she prepare the food? + What did Hoa do? * Vocabulary: - to slice(v) - pepper(n) - to add(v) - salt(n) - taste(v) - pan(n) - heat(v) - soy-sauce(n) - stir-fry(v) - chop stick(n) - dish-plate(n) - spoon(n) (19’) 1. Read the text and answer the question: 5’. + What did Hoa and her aunt and uncle.

(210) information to anwer the question and write the menu in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Calls some Ss to answer the question. Ss: Answer. T: Listens, corrects and gives key by sub-board. Ss: Compare the answers.. T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and rearrange them in order in group of six. Ss: Look at the pictures and arrange in group of six. T: Asks Ss to fill the missing verbs in the sentences. Ss: Complete the sentences in group of six. T: Calls Ss to read the completed sentences. Ss: Read athe sentences. T: Listens, corrects and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to match the instructions to the pictrures in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answer. Ss: Read the result. T: Listens, corrects and gives key.. have for dinner?. 7’. * Menu: - Cucumber, salad with onions. - Boiled spinach. - Stir-fried beef with green peper and onions. - Rice 2. Add the missing verbs then match the instructions to the pictures:. * Key: * Add the missing verbs: 1. slice 5. add 2. slice 6. boil 3. heat 7. add 4. stir-fried. * Key: * Matching the instructions to the pictures:.

(211) T: Asks Ss to ask and answer about the meals yesterday in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practise. T: Listens and corrects mistakes.. 1 – c; 2 – f; 3 – a; 4 – d 5–b; 6–e; 7–g 3. Write. What did you eat and drink yesterday?. Ex: S1: What did you eat and drink for breakfast? S2: For breakfast, I ate…..I drank….. S1: What did you eat and drink for lunch? S2: For lunch, I ……. S1: What did you eat and drink for dinner? S2: For dinner, I……….. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Describe how to make meals, write the things which you ate and drank at the meals”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Describe about the meals. - Do exercises: 5/p.76 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 12. Let’s eat! B.1. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./02/ 2012. Period: 74. UNIT 12: LET’S EAT! B. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the dialogue between Ba and Doctor and retell about Ba’s story( He has a stomachache). Talk about protecting the health. 2. Skill: Groupwork, pairwork. To develop the reading skill..

(212) 3. Attitude: Love the foods, the health. Like talking about the food and protect the health, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + What did you eat and drink for breakfast? + What did you eat and drink for lunch? + What did you eat and drink for dinner? * Key: - I ate bread, milk. - I ate rice, fish, cabbage and drank orange juice. - I ate rice, beef and potatoes and drank water for dinner. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + What do you eat vegetables at the meals? + What do you do before cooking them? + Do you wash it well? Why? T: Gives the remarks. (10’) 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the picture in * Cue questions: the textbook and describe content of + Where’s Ba? the picture and guess. + What’s wrong with him? Ss: Look at the picture and answer the content of the text. T: Reads the dialogue once and calls Ss to answer the questions above. Ss: Listen and answer. - Ba’s at the Doctor. - He has a stomachache. T: Presents structure. * Structure:.

(213) Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise the words.. 3.3 Practice: T: Reads the dialogue twice. Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls some pairs. Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens, and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue again and fill the missing words in the blanks in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Calls Ss to read the answers. Ss: Read the words. T: Corrects and gives key. Ss: Write down. T: Calls Ss to read the completed story. Ss: Read aloud.. + Past simple tense: Ex: I ate spinach, but Mom and Dad didn’t. - Negative: Ex: I did not go to school yesterday. (17’) 1. Practice reading the dialogue:. 7’. 2. Complete the story:. * Key: 1. doctor 2. stick 3. asked 4. had 5. spinach 11. medicine. 6. wash 7. more carefully 8. vegetable 9. mark 10. she. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Read comprehension the dialogue between Ba and doctor, complete the Ba’story” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Practice reading the dialogue again. - Do exercises: 1, 2/p.76, 77 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 12. Let’s eat! B.2..

(214) * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: ..................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ........ Teaching date: Period: 75 7A:…./03/ 2012 UNIT 12: LET’S EAT!. B. 2 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the text about abalanced diet. Talk about the useful foods for health. 2. Skill: Groupwork, pairwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the foods, the health. Like talking about the balanced diet, the useful food for the health, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Retell the story about Ba. * Key: - The story(P. 119 in text book). 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Networds: T: Gives a topic “food”. Ss: Write the words. potato chicken foods fish T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss the question. Ss: Answer. T: Presents the tittle of reading “A. (8’). beef. * Cue questions: + Which foods do you like eating?.

(215) balanced diet”. Ss: listen. T: Reads the text once and presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practise the words.. 3.3 Practice: T: Gives Ss to read the text. Ss: Read the text. T: Calls Ss to read the text.. Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens, and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read the text again and find the answers in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read answer. T: Corrects and gives key.. (19’). * Vocabulary: - balanced (v) - diet(v) -affect(v) - whole life - cereal(n) - variety of (n). - morederate(v) - amounts - energy(v) - dairy(n) - life style(n) - sensibly (adv). 1. Practice reading the text:. 2. Answer the questions:. * Key: a. Sugar adds taste to food and it gave you energy. b. A balanced diet above is not enough, all people need exercise to keep a healthy life.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Read comprehension the text about normal diet and sensibly”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Practice reading the text again. - Do exercises: 3 /p.78 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 12. Let’s eat! B. 3,4. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: ......................................................................................................................................

(216) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ......... Teaching date: Period: 76 7A:…./03/ 2012 UNIT 12: LET’S EAT!. B. 3, 4 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to write a menu for themselves and their family, listen and get to know some foods and drinks. 2. Skill: Groupwork. To develop the speaking and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love the foods, the health. Like listening about the balanced diet, the useful food for the health, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Answer the question: What did you do to keep a healthy life? * Key: - Ss answer. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic “food”. * Jumble words Ss: Write the words. + B A L C E N D A= BALANCED +REECAL = CEREAL +DEIT = DIET + L F Y I S E E T L = LIFESTYLE T: Gives the remarks. 3. 2 Presentation: (7’) T: Asks Ss the question. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + How do you eat to make each meal health and balanced?.

(217) + What do you eat for breakfast? + What do you eat for lunch? + What do you eat for dinner? - Body building: fish, eggs, milk, chicken… - Energy giving: honey, sugar, candy,… - Protective: pineapple, vegetable, (20’) tomato…. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to choose foods in the pie 1. Write a menu for yourself and chart and write a menu for breakfast, your family: lunch, and dinner. - For breakfast:….. Ss: Write a menu. - For luch:……. T: Calls Ss to read their menu. - For dinner:……. Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens, and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and 2. Answer the questions: get to know name of each thing. Ss: Look at the pictures and read names of food. T: Reads the passage twice and asks Ss to listen and write the letters of what they ate and drank in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Reads the passage one more time, * Key: corrects and gives key. - Lan: b, d, f, g; - Ba: c, a, e, h; Ss: Listen and correct - Nga: a, d, g; - Hoa: b, e, g; 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “listen comprehension the passage and write about a menu for each person”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Practice writing a menu for each people in your family. - Do exercises: 4 /p.78 in workbook. - Prepare: Language forcus 4..

(218) * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 77 7A:…../ 03/ 2012 CORRECT THE THIRD WRITTEN TEST I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to correct the mistakes in the written test. 2. Skill: To develop listening, speaking ,writing and reading skill. 3. Attitude: study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Papers, key. 2. Students’: notebook, pen. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……./17. out:…………………. 2. Correct the test: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 2.1 Warm up: (4’) T: Asks some questions: * Questions: Ss: Answer the teacher.. + How are you? + What’s the date to day? + Have you done the test well? 2. 2 Task 1: (6’) Question I: T: Reads the passage once again. Ss: Listen and check. T: Calls Ss to read the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Reads the passage last time and * Key: 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T gives the key. 5. F 6. T 7. F 8.T Ss: Listen and check. 2. 3 Task 2: (8’) Question II: T: Calls Ss to read the dialogue in pair. * Answer the questions: Ss: Work in pair. T: Asks the questions. Ss: Answer the questions..

(219) T: Listen ,corrects and gives the key.. * Key: 1. Ba gave Hoa a pencil box. 2. He made it yesterday. 3. He made it from a piece of wood. 4. He took a couple og hours. Question III:. 2. 4 Task 3: T: Calls Ss to read the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Gives key and explains. Ss: Listen and write down.. (8’). 2. 5 Task 4: T: Calls Ss to write the past form of verbs on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects and gives key.. (5’). 1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B Question IV :. (8’). * Key: 1. gave 2. was/ were 3. saw Question V :. 2. 6 Task 5: T: Calls Ss to write the answers on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects mistakes and gives the key.. * Key:. 5. C 6. B 7. C 8. D. 4. bought 5. visited 6. filled. * Key: 1. I stayed at home/ I watched TV…... 2. Yes, I did./ No, I didn’t. 3. I get up ………. 4. I often brush my teeth……. 5. I am …… metter……centimeters.. 3. Consolidation: (4’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson. Correct mistakes in the test. Ss: Listen and say again. 4. Homework: (1’) - Prepare: Language Focus 4. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy:.

(220) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: Period: 78 7A:…./03/ 2012 LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review and consolidate the knowledge learned from Unit 9 to Unit 12. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the speaking and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love studying English, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……/ 17 out:………………… 2. Check up: - No check the old leson, Last period corected the test. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + Where were you yesterday? T: Gives the remarks. + What did you do? + Where did you go? 3. 2 Activity 1: (6’) 1. Exercise 1: Past simple tense: T: Asks Ss look at the pictures and guides Ss to practice. * Example a,: Ss: Look at the pictures and listen to + Did you do your homework last night? the teacher. - No, I watched T V. T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures, asks and answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listen s and corrects mistakes. * Key:.

(221) 3.3 Activity 2: T: Asks Ss to repeat the use of indefinite quantifier. . Ss: Repeat. T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and use the indefinite quantifier to write the correct expression for each picture. Ss: Write the expression. T: Calls some Ss to write on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects and gives key.. (9’). a, Write the correct expression:. * Key: B, a lot of tea. D, a lot of salt. C, a little sugar. E, too much coffee. b, Complete the dialogues:. T: Gives example and guides Ss to do exercise. Ss: Listen. T: Asks Ss to fill the correct indefinite quantifier in the dialogues in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practce. T: Listens, corrects and gives key.. T: Calls Ss to read the dialogues in pair. Ss: Read aloud. 3. 4 Activity 3:. b. No, I ate in a small stall. c. No, I went to the movies. d. No, I red a book. e. No. I played football. 2. Indefinite quantifier: a lot of, lots of, a little, too much.. * Key: A. Lan: a little or a lot of? Mrs. Quyen: Only a little. B. Dr. Le: … a lot of …. C. Mr. Nhat: ……too much coffee. D. Nam: …..a little…….. (7’). 2. Exercise 3. Too and either:.

(222) T: Asks Ss to read the dialogues in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls ssome pairs to read the dialogues. Ss: Read aloud. T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and make up the similar dialouge in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. 3. 5 Activity 4: T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures in exercise 4. and make up the eight dialogues with so and neither in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. 3. 6 Activity 5. T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and read the words in the box. and presents the way of making cucumber salad. Ss: Listen. T: Asks Ss to complete the sentences. Ss: Complate the sentences. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the complete sentences. T: Listens and corrects and gives key.. a, Read the dialogues:. b. Make up the similar dialogues:. Ex:. S1: I like mango. S2: I like mango, too.. (6’). Ex: A: I like corn. B: So do I. C: I don'’t like potatoes. D: Neither do I. (6’). * Key: b. wash c. slice. d. mix e. add. f. stir g. wait. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Review and consolidate the knowledge learned from Unit 9 to Unit 12”..

(223) Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (1’) - Do exercises. - Prepare: Unit 13. Activities – A 1, 2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./03/ 2012. Period: 79. UNIT 13. ACTIVITIES A. 1,2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to describe and talk about activities of sports and entertainment. Talk about the sports they like best 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop the speaking and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love sports, like talking about favorite sport, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, cards. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:……………… 2. Check up: * No check the old leson, last period review. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Sports: T: Calls Ss to write 10 sports the - soccer most popular in Viet Nam. - badminton Ss: Write words. - volleyball T: Gives the remarks. - ………. 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + What sports do you like best?.

(224) T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures, and talk about name of sports. Ss: Look at the pictures and say. T: Presents content of the reading and read the text once. Ss: Listen to the teaacher. T: Presents vocabulary. Ss: listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practise the words. Ss: Practice.. + What sports do you usually play in your free time?. * Vocabulary: - teenager : Thanh thiếu niên - skateboarding : trượt ba tanh 4 bánh - roller blading: trượt ba tanh bánh dọc - choice : sự lựa chọn - eventhough : thậm trí, mặc dù - world : thế giới (22’) - surprising : sự ngạc nhiên. 3.3 Practice: T: Calls some Ss to read the text. . Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Answer.. 1. Read text questions:. anser. the. + Tell me the ten most popular sports in USA? + Which sports do you play in the ten sports? + In Viet Nam , which sports do the teenagers usually play?. T: Asks Ss to answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects. 7’ T: Asks Ss to take a class survey in group of six with the list sports( use card). Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the result. Ss: Read the result. T: Add the result and gives reslut of. and. * Cue answers: a. No, it isn’t. My first choice is (football/…….). b. Yes, I do. / No, I don’t. 2. Take a class survey: Ex: S1: Which sports do you like best? S2: I like football best..

(225) survey. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Talk about the popularsports in USA and Viet Nam” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises. - Prepare: Unit 13. Activities – A 3 – 6 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./ 03/ 2012. Period: 80. UNIT 13. ACTIVITIES A. 3,5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to describe and talk about sports activities and their abilities, get to kow the way of using of adverbs and adjectives. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the listening and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love sports, like talking about favorite sports, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……/ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions. + Which sports do the teenagers usually play in Viet Nam? + Which sports do you like best? * Key: - They usually play badminton, football…… - I like….. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content.

(226) 3.1 Warm up: T: Gives topic” top ten sports of the USA”. Ss: Say sports. T: Gives the remarks.. (5’). 3. 2 Presentation: T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and read the sentences below. Ss: Look at the pictures and read. T: Asks Ss to look at the picture 1, and asks Ss the questions. Ss: Look at the pictures and answer. T: Presents the use of adverbs and adjectives Ss: Listen and write down.. (8’). * Cue questions: + How is she? + How does he play? * Structure: + Adjectives: Ex: a good student. an intelligent boy. a bad tennis player. - He is a skillful volleyball player. + Adverbs: V + adv. Ex: He plays well. She plays badly. He writes carefully. * Vocabulary: - good(adj) - well(adv) - skillful(adj) - skillfully(adv) - slow(adj) - slowly(adv) - quick(adj) - quickly(adv) - safe(adj) - safely(adv) - run(v) - player(n) - cycle(v). T: Presents vocabulary. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practice the words. Ss: Practice.. 3.3 Practice: T: Calls some Ss to read the sentences in pair. . Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to make the sentences. * Top ten sports of the USA: - baseball - soccer - badminton - volleyball - ……….. (19’). 1. Read the sentences: Ex: S1: He’s a good soccer plaer. S2: He plays well. 2. Make the sentences with adjs.

(227) with advs or adjs Ss: Make the sentences. T: Calls some Ss to write the sentences. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects mistakes.. T: Gives Ss to look at the pictures and guess sport activities in it. Ss: Look at the pictures and guess. T: Asks Ss to read the passages and change the adjs in the brackets to advs. Ss: Read and change the words. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Write the words on the board. T: Corrects and gives key.. and advs:. Ex: + I read the text carefully. + She writes slowly. + Hoa is a good student. 3. Write. Change the adjectives in brackets to adverbs:. * Key: + clear + careful + safe + careless + strict. - clearly - carefully - safely - carelessly - strictly. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “describe and talk about sport activities, the way of using adjectives and adverbs” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 1, 2/P. 82 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 13. Activities – A. 4,5 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: ..................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. ......... Teaching date: Period: 81 7A:…./03/ 2012 UNIT 13. ACTIVITIES.

(228) A. 4 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the passage about sport walking. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love sports, like sport walking, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……./ 17 out:…………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Write the sentences using adverbs and adjs.. * Key: - I play badminton badly. - He speaks very quickly. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Cue questions: T: Asks Ss some questions. + What do you do in your free time? Ss: Answer. + What sports do you usually play? T: Gives the remarks. + Do you like playing soccer? 3. 2 Presentation: (9’) T: Asks Ss Some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + Do you like walking? + Who in your family usually walk in the morning? + What sports activity does the writer take part in? + What is WFF? T: Reads the text once and presents * Vocabulary: vocabulary. - competition(n) - organize(v) Ss: Listen and write down. - volunteer(n) - expensve(v) T: Guides Ss to practice the words. - instead of(v) - participant(adv) Ss: Read aloud. - wish(v) - regular(v) - take part in - increase(v) 3.3 Practice: (18’).

(229) T: Reads the passage again. Ss: Listen to the etacher. T: Calls some Ss to read the passage. Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and the passage again and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Gives the answers. T: Corrects mistakes and gives key.. 1. Read the passage:. 2. Answer the questions:. * Key: a. He takes part in walking for Fun club. b. The writer’s school team won the first prize, they were so happy and wanted to keep the activity. c. One activity is a five km walk, walking 5 km to the beach on Sunday morning and the other is walk-toschool day. d. It’s 5 km from school to the beach. e. Wednesday is the WST day. f. Members living near school often take part in the WST day.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Read comprehension the passage about sport” Walking for Fun”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 3, 4/P. 83 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 13. Activities – B. 1, 2 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(230) Ngày………tháng…….năm 2012. Kiểm tra giáo án: …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:…./ 03/ 2012. Period: 82. UNIT 13. ACTIVITIES B. 1, 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to speak and write invitation recept or refuse invitation. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love sports, like talking about favorite sports, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…../ 17 out:…………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + What does the writer take part in? + How far is it from school to the beach? + What is the WTS day? * Key: - The writer take part in one club called “Walking For Fun”. - It is 5 km. - The WTS day is every wednesday. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Cue questions: T: Asks Ss some questions. + What sport activity do you take part Ss: Answer. in?.

(231) T: Gives the remarks.. + How many people take part in it? + Who are they?. 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and + What are and Ba doing? ask Ss the question. Ss: Look at the picture and answer. T: Presents about content of the dialogue: Ba wants Nam to play table tennis with him. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Plays the tape or reads the * Vocabulary: dialogue once and presents - can(v) - have to(v) vocabulary. - can’t(v) - to finish(v) Ss: Listen and write down. - ought to(v) - paddle(v) T: Guides Ss to practce the words. - must(v) - borrow(v) Ss: Read aloud. - wait for sbd T: Presents structures. Ss: Lisen and wite down.. * Structures: - Invitation: + Would you like to….? - I’d like to, but I can’t. - Ok. - Modal verbs: + Can: Có thể - Use talk about one’s ability. Ex: I can swim. She can speak English fluently. + Can’t: không thể - can’t = can not( is nergative form) Ex: I can’t play football. + Must: phải - Use to express feel of themselves, think what is necessary. Ex: We must study English. We must do the homework. + Have to: phải - Use to express thing outside. Ex: Her eyes are bad. She has to wear.

(232) glasses. + ought to : phải - Use to talk about advice Ex: We ought to help our new friends. + Should: nên - Talk about things we think that is good to do. Ex: This book is very interesting we should buy it/read it. 3.3 Practice: (18’) T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in 1. Practice the dialogue and answer pair. the questions: Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice T: Asks Ss to read the questions and the dialogue again and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Gives the answers. T: Corrects mistakes and gives key. * Key: a. Nam must finish his homework before he plays table tennis. b. Nam will be ready in a few minutes. c. Ba will finish a question for math. d. Ba has two paddles. T: Reads the dialogue once. 2. Listen. Making a new dialogue: Ss: Listen. T: Asks Ss to make a new dialogue in pair base on the dialogue use the cue words. Ss: Work in pair. T: Helps Ss to practice and checks some pairs.( use the sub-board) Ss: Practice..

(233) T: Corrects and gives key. (subboard). * Key: Ba: Come and play volleyball, Nam. Nam: I’m sorry. I don’t think I can. Ba: That’s too bad. Why not? Nam: Well, I should clean my room. Ba: Can you play on Friday? Nam: Yes, I can. Ba: All right. See you at seven. Nam: Ok. Bye. Ba: Bye.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “talk about invitation recept or refuse” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 1 /P. 83 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 13. Activities – B. 3, 4 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:…./03/ 2012. Period: 83. UNIT 13. ACTIVITIES B. 3,4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehention the passage about scuba-diving sport. 2. Skill:Groupwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love sports, like talking about divers, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’).

(234) 7A:……./ 17 out:…………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Write the sentences with: can, must, have to: * Key: - I can swim. - I must do my homework. - She has to cook dinner. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives a topic “sports”. * Networks: Ss: Write the words. soccer T: Gives the remarks. sports swim. badminton. table tennis. 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and ask Ss to guess “What sports is this?”. Ss: Look at the picture and answer. T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + Do you know this sport? + Where can you see people play this kind of sport? + What do you need in order to scuba dive? T: Reads the passage once and * Vocabulary: presents vocabulary. - surface(n) - to invent(v) Ss: Listen and write down. - under water(n) - deep-sea(v) T: Guides Ss to practce the words. - pearl diver(n) - vessel(n) Ss: Read aloud. - equipment(n) - explore(v) - invetion(n) T: Presents structures. * Structures: Ss: Lisen and wite down. + Could: (is past form of can) Ex: I could ride a bike. He could explore the ocean of the world and study under water life. - Negative form: Could + not:.

(235) Ex: I could not(couldn’t) read at four 3.3 Practice: (18’) T: Calls Ss to read the passage. 1. Read the passage. Then answer Ss: Read aloud. the questions: T: Asks Ss to read the questions and the passage again and find information to choose the sentences true or false in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Gives key and asks Ss to compare. Ss: Exchange the answers and compare and correct. T: Calls groups to remarks and gives * Key: key. a. False: Most of the world’s surface is water. b. True. c. False. Now, scuba-diving is a popular sport because people can swim freely in the water with the help of special breathing equipment. d. False. Jackques Coustues invented a deep-sea diving vessel. e. True. T: Asks Ss to read the passage and 2. Complete the passage with the fill the suitable words in the blanks modal verbs in the box: in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Calls Ss to read the completed passage. Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens and corrects mistakes and * Key: gives key.(sub-board) 1. can 4. should 2. must 5. can 3. must not 6. ought to/ show 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “read comprehention the passage about scubadiving”. 5. Homework: (2’).

(236) - Do exercises: 2, 3 /P. 84 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 14. Free Time Fun – A. 1 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./ 03/ 2012. Period: 84. UNIT 14. FREETIME FUN A. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about activities in the free time, give suggestions and answer the invitation/ suggetions. 2. Skill:Pairwork. To develop the speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love watching TV, like talking about program on TV, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, cards. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:………/ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (15’) Test: 15’ * Requirement: Exercise1: Choose the best answer: 1. Most of the word’s surface…….(is/ am/ are) water. 2. Students must……..(do/ doing/ to do) the homework. 3. You…….( should/ must/ have to) get up early. 4. She can…….(swim/ to swim/ swimming). 5. Jacques Cousteau……..( could/ can/ can’t) explore the oceas of the world and study under water life. Exercise 2. Write the sentences using the cue words: 1. Lan/ could/ sing/ 4. 2. you/ ought to/ study/ harder/. 3. She/ must/ do/ homework/. 4. Mrs. Vui/ have to/ look after/ baby/..

(237) 5. I/ can/ swim/. * Key: Exercise 1. 1. is 2. do 3. should 4. swim 5. could Exercise 2. 1. Lan could sing at 4. 2. You ought to study harder. 3. She must do her homework. 4. Mrs. Vui has to look after her baby. 5. I can swim. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (4’) T: Asks Ss the question. T: What do you do in your free time? Ss: Answer. S1: I watch TV. T: Gives the remarks. S2: I play soccer. 3. 2 Presentation: (7’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + Do you like watching TV? T: Asks Ss some questions. + How often do you watch TV? Ss: Answer. + What time? Where? at home or the other places? T: Asks Ss to look at the list table of * Cue questions: programs and asks Ss some + Where do you read them? questions. + What are Hoa’s family doing? Ss: Look at the table and answer. + Do they watch TV? T: Presents content of the dialogue: Hoa and Lan are talking about what they often do in the evening. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Reads the dialogue and presents * Vocabulary: newwords. - cricket (n) - guess (v) Ss: Listen and write. - chess (n) - enjoy (v) T: Guides Ss to practice the words. - boring (adj) - prefer (n) Ss: Read aloud. T: Presents structures. * Structures: Ss: Lisen and wite down. + Invitation: Would you like to….? - like (v): like + to-infinitive/ V-ing. Ex: I like to play soccer. I like playing soccer..

(238) + Prefer to + infinitive. + Prefer + V-ing. Ex: I prefer to study English subject. I prefer studying English subject. 3.3 Practice: (13’) T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in 1. Read the dialogue. pair. Ss: Work in Pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue again 2. Choose the best answer: and choose the best answer in group of six. ( use cards) Ss: Work in group of six. T: Gives key and asks Ss to compare. Ss: Exchange the answers, compare and correct. T: Calls groups to remarks and gives * Key: key. a. C c. B e. D b. A d. C 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “talk about activities in the free time. Invite or cue and answer the invitation/ cueing” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (1’) - Do exercises: 1, 2 /P. 87,88 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 14. Free Time Fun – A. 2 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. . Teaching date:. Period: 85.

(239) 7A:…./ 03/ 2012. UNIT 14. FREETIME FUN A. 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about the suggestions, practice speaking the activities in the free time with hobby, watching films or plays. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love watching films, plays, like talking about films, plays, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, advertisements in the textbook, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:….../ 17 out:……………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: + Write sentences with “ like, prefer”? * Key: - I like watching films. - I prefer cartoons to films. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the question. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + Would you like a cup of tea? T: Gives the remarks. + Would you like to drink a cup of coffe? + Would you like to play soccer? 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Asks Ss to look at the advertisements about film programmes and entertainment programmes and read it. Ss: Look at it and read. T: Presents content of the dialogue * Vocabulary: and presents the vocabulary. - classical (music) (n) Ss: Listen and write down. - concert (n) T: Guides Ss to practice the words. - sound (adj) Ss: Read aloud. - cowboy movie(n) - detective movie(n).

(240) T: Presents structures. Ss: Lisen and wite down.. T: Explains and guides Ss the usage.. 3.3 Practice: (17’) T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in Pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T:Asks Ss to read the advertisements agai and make up one timetable yourself. Ss: Read and make up a timetable. T: Uses sub-board and gives a dialogue. Ss: Look at it. T: Asks Ss to make a new conversation in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes (if any).. - advertisement(n) - drama club(n) * Structures: + Invitation sentences: Would you like to….? Ex: Would you like to go to the movie? + Let’s: ( want sbd to go with) Ex: Let’s go to the zoo. Let’s go fishing. + What about you?/ How about you? Ex: S1: Are you free on friday? S2: I go to the zoo. S1: What about Monday? S2: No, sorry. I……… 1. Read the dialogue.. 2. Make up a similar conversation:. * Example: A: Would you like to go to the plays this week? B: That sounds good. What would you like to see? A: There is an easy life play on at the Youth Theater. B: Ok. Can you make it on Tuesday night?.

(241) A: Sorry. I have to go to the New Age Theather. How about Wednesday? B: No, sorry. I’m going to see a play and I’m busy on Thursday, too. Are you free on Friday? A: No, I’m not. What about Saturday? B: That’s ok. A: Fine. Let’s go on Friday. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “talk about activities in the free timepractice speaking about the films or plays you like”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 3 /P. 89 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 14. Free Time Fun – A. 3, 4 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./04/ 2012. Period: 86. UNIT 14. FREETIME FUN A. 3, 4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Pracrice speaking the activities in the free time, talk about TV in Viet Nam and programmes of TV. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love watching films, plays, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the textbook, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…../ 17 out:…………………….

(242) 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: + Invite a friend to see a play or a game. * Key: A: Would you like to go to the movies on this week? B: That sound good. What would you like to see? A: There is a detective movie on at the Fansland Theater. B: Ok. Can you make it on Tuesday? A: Sorry. I have to go to the market. How about Wednesday? 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss the question. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + What do you do on free time? T: Gives the remarks. + Do you often play soccer? + Do you like watching TV? ……………………………………. 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Look at the pictures and answer. + Do you like watching TV? + Do you have one at home? + What about your neighbors? + What about ten years ago? + What abou 30 years ago? + Was TV a popular thing 30 years ago? + What happened? T: Presents pictures and content of the passage. Ss: Look at the pictures and listen to the teacher. T: Reads the text and presents * Vocabulary: vocabulary. - owner (n) - outside Ss: Listen and write down. - gather (v) - spend(v) T: Guides Ss to practice the words. - inside(pre) - together Ss: Read aloud. - through(pre) - neighbor(n) - comfortable(adj) 3.3 Practice: (19’) T: Calls Ss to read the passage. 1. Read the Passage..

(243) Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens and corrects mistakes pronunciation. T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Answer.. T: Asks Ss to read passage again and read the summary and fill the suitable words in the blankets in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answer. Ss: Read the answer. T: Gives the key by sub-board with the completed summary. Ss: Compare and correct the answer .. * Cue questions: + Were there a lot of TVs thirty years ago? + What were there TV owers like? + Did the neighbors went to home before finishing the TV program? + Do they spend much time together? 2. Complete the summary:. * Key: (1)people (2) not (3) TV (4) popular. (5)evening (6) gather (7) they (8) today. (9) have (10) life (11) know. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ talk about TV of Viet Nam 30 years ago”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 4 /P. 89 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 14. Free Time Fun – B. 1, 2 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Ngày…….tháng………năm 2012. Kiểm tra giáo án dân chủ:.

(244) …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:…./ 04/ 2012. Period: 87. UNIT 14. FREETIME FUN B. 1, 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the dialogue and talk about their favorite TV programs on TV, listen comprehension a dialogue and write the times of the programs. 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop the reading and listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love TV programs, like talking about favorite TV programs, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the textbook, cassettle, tape. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: + summary the text about TV in Viet Nam. * Key: The summary in textbook on page 142. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Calls some Ss to say some * Examples: sentences using like, prefer. + I like watching film. Ss: Say. + She likes playing badminton. T: Gives the remarks. + He prefers tea to coffee. ……………………………………. 3. 2 Presentation: (7’).

(245) T: Gives Ss to look at the picture and get to know characters in cartoon on TV. Ss: Look at the pictures and say. T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Listen and answer.. T: Presents the content of the dialogue between Nga and Ba. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Plays the tape twice. Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens, corrects, and gives key.. * Cue questions: + What kind of TV program is the character from? + Do you like this cartoon program?. * Structure: + What kind of programs do you like? - I like programs about teenagers in the countries. - like + V-ing/ to + V. Ex: I don’t really like to watch movies. + Prefer+ V-ng. Ex: I prefer watching cartoon. They prefer listening to the radio. (20’) 1. Read the dialogue and answer the questions.. * Key: a. No, because there aren’t any good programs of teenager..

(246) T: Asks Ss some questions. Ss: Answer.. T : Plays the tape twice, and asks Ss to listen and write the times of the programs in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the result. Ss: Read the result. T: Listens, corrects and gives key.. b. Ba watches sport shows, cartoons and movies. c. Nga likes to watch programs about teenagers on other countries. d. Nga doesn’t like the music program because they don’t play the kind of music she likes. e. This evening Nga is going to listen to the radio and may be read a book. 2. Listen. Write the times of the programs: * Cue questions: + Which programs do you like watching? + Which programs do you often watch? + What time do you know each of these programs on?. * Key: a. Childen’s program starts at five. b. The early news is at six. c. The weather forecast is at ten past six. d. The world today is at a quarter past six. e. The movie “ A first full of Dollars” starts at seven.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ read comprehension the dialogue and talk about their favorite TV programs on TV, listen comprehension the dialogue and write the times of the programs”. Ss: Listen and say again..

(247) 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 1, 2 /P. 90 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 14. Free Time Fun – B.3, 4 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./ 04/ 2012. Period: 88. UNIT 14. FREETIME FUN B. 3, 4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Read comprehension the passages about popular TV programs: pop music, contests, imports. complete the passage about satellite and cable TV. 2. Skill: Pairwork, groupwork. To develop the reading and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love TV programs, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the textbook, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: - Anweer the questions: + Does Nga like watch TV? + What programs does Ba like to watch? + What programs does Nga like to watch? * Key: - No, she doesn’t. - He likes sports shows, cartoons and movies. - She likes to watch programs about teenagers in other countries. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions:.

(248) Ss: Answer. T: Gives the remarks.. 3. 2 Presentation: T: Gives Ss to look at the picture and asks Ss the question. Ss: Look at the pictures and answer. T: Presents programs. Ss: Listen to the teacher.. + Do you like watching TV? + What do you like to watch on TV? + When do watch TV? ……………………………………. (9’) * Cue questions: + Who are they? P1: The music band Moffast. P2: The famous in inspeeter sherlock homes. P3: A scense from the “ To the speak of the Olympia”. T: Presents popular TV programs: Pop music, contests, imports. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Reads the passages and presents newwords. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to read the newwords. Ss: Practice.. 3.3 Practice: T: Calls Ss to read the passages. Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find information to answer in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens, corrects, and gives key.. * Vocabulary: - board(n): - audience(n) - artist(n) - band(n) - contest(n) - knowleedge(n) - folk music(n) - so on. - contestant(n) - viewer(n) - question(n) - import(v) - foreign(n) - include - station. (18’) 1. Read the passages and answer the questions.. * Key: a. Teenagers like to hear the lastest Pop Music and see the shows of their favorite artist. b. In contest programs, the contestants are students, workers or.

(249) T: Gives meaning of the words in the box, and asks Ss to complete the passage in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Listens and gives key.. family members. c. Imports usually include police and hospital series. d. Students’ answer. 2. Write.. Complete the passage, use the words in the box:. * Key: (1) around (2) watch (3) listen (4) series (5) show. (6) like (7) station (8) receive (9) cities (10) possible. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ read comprehension the passages and talk about the popular TV programs on TV, complete the passage about satellite and cable TV”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 3, 4, 5 /P. 91, 92 in workbook. - Prepare: Do the fourth written test . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A: ……./04/2012. Period: 89. THE FOURTH WRITTEN TEST. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to:.

(250) 1. Knowledge: Checking the students’ knowledge, vocabulary and grammar from Unit 12 to Unit 14. Ss apply the knowledge learned to do the test. + Vocabulary: adjectives and adverbs, freetime fun, so, either, neither,too. + Grammar: modal verbs: should, have to; adjectives; adverb, present simple, like + V-ing, prefer. + Listening: Listen comprehension the passage about Nam’s activities. + Reading: TV in Viet Nam in 1960s + Writing: Write sentences with like/ should/ prefer…... 2. Skill: Develop the listening, reading and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love learning English, do the test seriously. II. Testing form. - Objective test. - Time: 45 minutes. - Do the test at school. III. Procedure 1. Organization: (1’) 7A: ……/14 out: ………………… 2. Test: A. Matrix: Level Standard (Unit 12-14). Apply Realize. Grasp throughly. Low. High. Total. Listen to the passage about Nam’s activities.. Listening (Unit: 13). Sen...: 5 Point: 2,5. Sen: 5 Point: 2,5 Percent: 25 %. - adv and adj. -like + V-ing. - Modal verb(ought to, should). Vocabulary - so, either, … and grammar - Let’s eat. (Unit:12,13,14) - Free time Fun.. Sen: 10 Point: 2,5 Reading. - Read the passage. Sen: 10 Point: 2,5pts Percent: 25 %.

(251) about TV in Viet Nam in 1960s.. (Unit: 14). Sen: 6 Point: 3 Percent: 30%. Sen: 6 Point: 3 -Modal verbs: must. - would like… - prefer - adverbs and adjectives.. Writing (Unit: 12, 13,14). Sen...: 4 Point: 2 Total. Sen: 10 Point: 4 Percent:40 %. Sen: 8 Point: 4 Percent:40 %. Sen: 4 Point: 2 Percent:20%. Sen: 4 Point: 2 Percent: 20 % Total Sen: 22 Point: 10 Percent:100%. B. Questions. Question I . Listen and fill the miss words in the brackets : (2,5 marks) Nam is astudent at Quang Trung school . He is 12 years old. He likes (1) …………very much. He is a (2) …………player. He usually (3) ………… soccer with his (4) …………in his free time . Last year, he played (5) ………… in the football match between his school and Tran Phu school . Question II . Read the paragraph then do the tasks bellow (3 marks): In 1960s, most people in Vietnam did not have a T.V set. The people T.Vs were popular. In the evening, the neighbors would gather around the T.V. They would stay until the T.V programs finished. Viet Nam is different now . More families had a T.V set and life is more comfortable. But neighbors don’t spend each other as well as they did in the past * True (T) or False (F) scentences? 1. ………. Many years ago , most people in Vietnam had a T.V set . 2. ………. The owners of T.Vs were very popular . 3. ………. The neighbors would gather around the T.V in the evening ..

(252) 4. ………. Neighbors wouldn’t stay until the T .V programs finished . 5. ………. Now life is more comfortable , more families had a T.V set . 6. ………. people still spend each other as well as they did in the past today . Question III . Choose the best answer (2,5 marks): 1. My brother is a ……… badminton player . He plays really well. A. play. B. worse. C. good. D. well. C. playing. D. plays. 2. Lan likes ………………….. tennes. A. play. B. played. 3. I prefer watching the news …………… T.V . A. at. B. on. C. for. D. in. 4. Mary is a quick runner . She runs ……………………….. A. quickly. B. slow. C. slowly. D. quick. 5. A: I don’t like chicken. B: ……..do I. A. So B. Either C. Neither D. Too 6. ………….. She like skipping rope ? – Yes, she ……………………. A. Does/ does B.Do/ do C. is / is D. Are/ are 7. Lan has a toothache . She ought to ………………a dentist . A. to see B. seeing C. seen D. see 8. Laura is too fat . She …………….eat too much meat and sweet. A. shoudn’t B. should C. have to D. has to 9. Let’s buy an ……… A. banana B. pine apple C. orange D. cucumber 10. ……music is the short form of “popular music”. A. song B. concert C. Pop D. classical Question IV . Rearrange the sentences with the suitable meaning (2 marks) : 1. We / the/ must / do / homework /. 2. What /like/ you/ for/ would/ dinner?/ 3. Hoa / listening / music / prefers/to/ . 4. is/ a/ he/ good / player/ soccer/ ..

(253) C. Answers: Question I: * Tapescript and key: Nam is astudent at Quang Trung school . He is 12 years old. He likes sports very much. He is a good soccer player. He usually plays soccer with his friends in his free time . Last year, he played well in the football match between his school and Tran Phu school . * Key: (1) sports (3) plays (5) well (2) good soccer (4) friends Question II: * T or F ? 1. F 2. T 3. T 4. F 5. T 6. F Question III: * Key: 1.C 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. C 6. A 7. D 8. A 9. C 10. C Question IV: 1. We must do the homework 2. What would you like for dinner? 3. Hoa prefers listening to music. 4. He is a good soccer player. D. Marks: Question I : 2,5 marks ( 0,5 x 5) Question II : 3 marks (0,5 x 6) 3. Consolidation: (2’) T: - Hands in the papers - Remarks the test. 4. Homework: (1’) - Prepare : Unit 15. Going out – A 1. Question III : 2,5 marks (0,25 x 10) Question IV : 2 marks (0,5 x 4). * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy:. ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………….

(254) Teaching date: 7A:…./04/ 2012. Period: 90. UNIT 15. GOING OUT A. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to give advice and answer about playing the video games. Talk about video games and effects of them 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love playing the video games, like talking about the video games, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the textbook. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 14 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) - No check the old lesson, last period did the test. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + What do you do in your free time? T: Gives the remarks. + Do you play video games? + How often do you play? ……………………………………. 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Gives Ss to look at the picture and * Cue questions: asks Ss the question. + What can you see in the picture? Ss: Look at the pictures and answer. - amusement: Trung t©m vui ch¬i T: Presents the picture and asks Ss + Are there any amusement Center in some questions. the town/ village? Ss: Answer. + Do you often go to an amusenment Center? + What do you see/do there?.... T: Presents content of the dialogue: Lan and Nam are talking about video games..

(255) Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Reads the dialogue and presents new words. Ss: Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to read the newwords. Ss: Practice. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. * Vocabulary: - addictive (adj): - arcade(v) - spend (v) - video games(n) * Structures: + Advice: Khuyên ai đó… - Don’t spend too much time…. Answer: “ Don’t worry, I won’t…..” + Must: ph¶i Ex: You must do your exercises. You must be careful. + Mustn’t: không đợc phép Ex: He mustn’t stay up late. you mustn’t smoke. You mustn’t go out. You mustn’t brush your teeth everyday.. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in (17’) 1. Practice the dialogue. pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens, corrects mistakes. T: Gives Ss to read the questions and 2. Answer the questions: find information to answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens, corrects mistakes and * Key: gives the key. a. He is going to amusement Center. b. He is going to play video games. c. He goes to the amusement Center aboiut once a week. d. No, he doesn’t. He doesn’t spend much money..

(256) e. He usually stays for an hour. f. Nam must be careful because video games can be addictive. h. He’ll do his homework late. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ read comprehension the dialogue and answer the questions about play video games”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 1 /P. 94 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 15. Going out - A. 2 . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: ..................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. ......... Teaching date: Period: 91 7A:…./04/ 2012 UNIT 15. GOING OUT. A. 2 I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able read comprehension the text and complete the sentences, talk about inventors into video games. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love playing the video games, like talking about the inventors into video games, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbook, teacher's book, pictures in the textbook, sub-board. 2. Students’: Textbook, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions. + Where is Nam going? + What is he going to do? + How often does he goes?.

(257) + How long does he usually stay? * Key: - He is going to the amusement center. - He is going to play video games. - About once a week. - He usually stays for about an hour. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Cue questions: T: Asks Ss some questions. + Do you know video games? Ss: Answer. + Have you ever play them? T: Gives the remarks. + Do you like playing them? + How do you feel when you play? ……………………………………. 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Gives Ss to look at the picture and presents the text. Ss: Look at the pictures and listen to the teacher. T: Reads the text once and presents * Vocabulary: newwords. - to become (v): - dizzy (adj) Ss: Listen and write down. - rich (adj) - activity (n) T: Guides Ss to read the words. - fun (adj) - outdoor Ss: Practice. - tired(adj) - develop (19’) - skill (adj) 3.3 Practice: T: Reads the text one more time. 1. Practice the dialogue. Ss: Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Calls some Ss to read the text. Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens, corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to choose the best answer 2. Answer the questions: to complete the sentences in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the completed sentences. T: Writes the answers on the board * Key:.

(258) and gives the key. a. D b. A c. D d. B Ss: Compare the answers and correct. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ read comprehension the text and complete the sentences about the inventors about video games”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 2 /P. 94 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 15. Going out - A. 3 * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Ngày…..tháng……năm 2012. Kiểm tra giáo án: …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… Teaching date: 7A:…./04/ 2012. Period: 92. UNIT 15. GOING OUT A. 3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able read comprehension and complete the passage with the cue words about video cameras. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude:Loving video cameras, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbook, teacher's book, cards, sub-board. 2. Students’: Textbook, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’).

(259) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (15’) Test 15’ * Requirement: Exercise 1: Listen and complete the dialogue(4 marks): Lan: Do you …..watching TV, Nga? Nga: Yes, I do. Lan: What kind of ………do you like? Nga: I like to watch ……… What about you? Lan: There are many programs I like, but I like watching ………. most. …………………………………………………………………………. Exercise 2: Complete the sentences use the cue words(6 marks): 1. She likes………(to play/ playing/ played/ plays) badminton. 2. …….(Do/ Did/ Does/ to do) Mai watch TV? 3. Would you like……..(coming/ come/ comes/ to come) to my house for lunch? 4. You ……..( have to/ must/ ought to/ should) do your homework. 5. What ……….you……..(are….going/ is…..going/ am….going) to do tonight? 6. I prefer………( watch/ to watch/ watches/ watching) sports. * Key: Exercise 1: Lan: Do you like watching TV, Nga? Nga: Yes, I do. Lan: What kind of programs do you like? Nga: I like to watch cartoons. What about you? Lan: There are many programs I like, but I like watching movies most. Exercise 2: 1. playing 3. to come 5. are….going 2. Does 4. must 6. watching 3. New lesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + Where have you ever gone to banks/ T: Gives the remarks. supermarkets…..? + Have you seen a camera? + What do you know about it? 3. 2 Presentation: (8’).

(260) T: Asks Ss to read the passage once. Ss: Read silence. T: Explains the meaning of the words in the box. Ss: Listen and write. T: Presents vocabulary. Ss : Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practice the words. Ss: Practice.. * Vocabulary: - video camera: máy ghi hình - protect(v) bảo vệ - robbery: tên cướp - education: giáo dục - teaching aid: đồ dùng dạy học - university: trường đại học VCDs: đĩa ghi hình. 3.3 Practice: (11’) T: Áks Ss to complete the pasage in * Complete the passage: group of five (diliver cards). Ss: Work in group of five. T: Checks the answers. * Key: Ss: Exchange the answers 1. be 6. use T: Corrects and gives key(sub2. have 7. can board). 3. is 8. will Ss: Look at the board and correct. 4. identify 9. buy 5. are 10. show 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Complete the passage with the cue words about video camera” Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (1’) - Do exercises: 3 /P. 95 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 15. Going out - B. 1,2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(261) Teaching date: 7A:…./04/ 2012. Period: 93. UNIT 15. GOING OUT B. 1, 2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the dialogue and answer the questions about transports. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the transports, get to know the transports, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbook, teacher's book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Textbook, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) - Checking the exercises. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + Do you like living in the country or T: Gives the remarks. city? + What is the life in the country? + What is the life in the city? 3. 2 Presentation: (9’) T: Asks Ss the question. + Do you like living in the country or Ss: Answer. in the city? Why? T: Presents content of the dialogue. Ss : Listen to the teacher. T: Reads the dialogue once and asks * Cue questions: Ss some questions. + Who likes living in the city? Ss: Listen and answer. + Who likes living in the country? + Why? T: Presents the vocabulary. * Vocabulary: Ss: Listen and write down. - traffic(n) - awake T: Guides Ss to practice the words. - busy road(n) - the rest of Ss: Practice. - used to(v).

(262) - get used to * Structures: + What do you/ they/ we/ do in the evening? - I/ we/ they stay at home. + What does he/ she do in the evening? - She/ He plays the piano.. T: Presents structure. Ss: Listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Calls some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find out the answers in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens, corrects mistakes and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to ask and answer the questions in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listen and corrects. (18’) 1. Read the dialogue and answer the questions.. * Key: a. She goes to the school theater once aweek. The rest of the week she usually stays at home in the evening. b. No, she doesn’t like the city. c. Before Hoa lived in a village near Hue. d. She liked living there because she knew all the people in her neighborhood, the village was quiet and there was only alittle traffic. e. She doesn’t like the city because it is noisy and the roads are busy. f. She hates crossing the road most.Because there are bikes, motorbikes and cars coming from every direction and they scare her. 2. Asks and answer the questions about you:.

(263) * Key: a. I usually do my homework/ watch TV……… b. Yes, I do. Because It is convenient. - No, I don’t. Because I hate the noise and the busy road/ the food is fresh……. c. Yes, I do. Because the air is fresh… - No, I don’t. Because It is not convenient…….. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ read comprehension the dialogue and the questions about the dialogue and about you”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 4 /P. 95 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 15. Going out - B. 3,4. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:……./04/2012. Period: 94. UNIT 15. GOING OUT B. 3, 4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehension the passage about Hoa and make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening with the simple present tense. Listen comprehension the dialogue and match each name to an activity. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading, listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love the transports, get to know the transports, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbook, teacher's book, sub-board, cassettle player, tape. 2. Students’: Textbook, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’).

(264) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + Who likes living in the city? Why? + Who likes living in the country? Why? + What does Hoa dislike most about the city? Why? * Key: + Lan likes living in the city. Because she gets used to it. + Hoa likes living in the country. Because she hates the noise and the busy roads in the city. + She hates crossing the road most. Because ……… 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss some questions. * Cue questions: Ss: Answer. + What do you do in the evening? T: Gives the remarks. + Do you like the city? Why? Why not? + Do you like the countryside? Why? Why not? 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Presents contents of the text: tell + Do you like living in the country or how to Hoa got used to the city life. in the city? Why? Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Reads the passage once and * Structure: presents structure. + like/ prefer + to-infinitive. Ss : Listen and write down. + like + gerund(V-ing) Ex: She liked playing chess very much. + She prefered to sociallize with her friends. 3.3 Practice: (19’) T: Asks Ss to read the passage and 1. Read the passage and make the find information to make a list of the list of the things Hoa does in the things Hoa does in the evening. Use evening: the simple present tense. Ss: Makes the list..

(265) T: Calls some Ss to write on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find out the answers in paCorrects and gives key.. T: Gives Ss to see the pictures and gives name of the activities in the pictures. Ss: Look at the pictures and gives names. T: Plays the tape twice and asks Ss to listen and match each name to an activity which they did yesterday. Ss: Listen and and match. T: Checks the result. Ss: Read the result. T: Plays the tape last time, corrects and gives key.. * Key: - She visits her friends. - She talks and listens to music with her friends - They help each other with her homework. - She plays table tennis and plays chess with her friends. - She socialize with her friends. - She goes to the library and borrows books. 2. Listen. Match each name to an activity:. * Key: Ba: b Hoa: a. Nga : d Nam: c. Lan: f An: e. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ read comprehension the passage and the list of the things Hoa does in the evening, listen and match each name to an activity”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 5 /P. 96 in workbook. - Prepare: Correct the test . * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: ...............................................................................................................................................

(266) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A: ….../04/2012. Period: 95. CORRECT THE FOURTH WRITTEN TEST. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to correct the mistakes in the fourth written test. 2. Skill: To develop listening, speaking ,writing and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Correct the test seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Papers, key. 2. Students’: notebook, pen. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:……./17. out:…………………. 2. Correct the test: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 2.1 Warm up: (5’) * Cue questions: T: Asks some questions: + How are you? Ss: Answer the teacher. + Are there any difficult exercises? + Have you done the test well? T: Remarks the test. 2. 2 Task 1: (7’) Question I: T: Reads the passage once again and asks Ss to read the answers. Ss: Gives the answers. T: Reads the passage one more time * Key: and gives the key. 1. sports 4. friends Ss: Listen and check. 2. good soccer 5. well 3. plays 2. 3 Task 2: (8’) Question II: T: Calls Ss to read the passage. * True (T), False (F) : Ss: Read the passage aloud. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers..

(267) * Key:. T: Corrects and gives the key. 2. 4 Task 3: T: Calls Ss to read the sentences and the best answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Gives key and explains. Ss: Listen and write down.. (8’). 2. 5 Task 4: T: Calls Ss to write the sentences on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects mistakes and gives the key.. (10’). 1. F 4. F Question III:. * Key: 1. C 2. C 3. B. 2. T 5. T. 4. A 5. C 6. A. 7. D 8. A 9. C. 3.T 6. F. 10. C. Question IV :. * Key: 1. We must do the homework. 2. What would you like for dinner? 3. Hoa prefers listening to music. 4. He is a good soccer player.. 3. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson: “correct mistakes in the test”. Ss: Listen and say again. 4. Homework: (1’) - Prepare: Unit 16: People and place - A 1,2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./04/2012. Period: 96. UNIT 16. PEOPLE AND PLACE A. 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:.

(268) 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about some names of countries and cities and the different tour places in Asia. Read comprehension the dialogue between Ba and Hoa, talk about the flights of Ba’s uncle. - Review adverbs of frequency. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love traveling, like getting to know about countries and cities in Asia, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbook, teacher's book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Textbook, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: - No check the old lesson. Last period corrected the test. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and * Cue questions: asks Ss some questions. + What this? Ss: Answer. + What do you know any countries or T: Gives the remarks. cities in Asia? + Do you like traveling to some countries in Asia? 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Presents contents of the dialogue:Ba talk to Hoa about her uncle, a pilot. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Plays the tape once and presents * Vocabulary: vocabulary. - pilot(n) - Vientaine Ss : Listen and write down. - to fly (v) - Yangon T: Guides Ss to practice the words. - region(n) - album Ss: Practice. - as well as - Kuala Lumpur – Malaysia - Singapore – Singapore - Jakarta – Indonesia.

(269) - Bangkok - Thailand * Structure: (Review) + Adverb of frequency: always, usually, often, sometimes, never. Ex: I always go to school early. He usually go to bed late.. T: Presents structures. Ss: Listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Plays the tape one more time. Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to match the halfsentences in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Reads the answers. T: Corrects and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to read the names of countries in the box and fill in table with the suitable capitals. Ss: Complete the table. T: Gives the key by sub-board. Ss: Compare and correct mistakes.. (22’) 1. Read the dialogue, then match the half-sentences:. 5’. * Key: a – D : Ba’s uncle is a pilot. b – F : Uncle Nghia sends postcard to Ba from the cities he visits. c – B : Ba keeps the postcard as well as the stamps. d – C : Ba puts the stamps in a special book. e – A : Hoa wants to see the stamps. f – E : Ba and Hoa would like to visit many differents place. 2. Complete the table. Use the names of the countries in the box: Capital Bangkok Beijing Kuala Lumpur Phnom Penh. Country Thailand China Malaysia Cambodia.

(270) T: Asks Ss to ask and answer about Ba’s uncle in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects.. Vientaine Yangon Jakarta. Laos Myanmar Indonesia. Ex: A: Where does Ba’s uncle fly to? B: He usually flies to Bangkok. A: Where is that? B: It’s in Thailand.. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ get to know about names of the countries and cities. Read comprehension the dialogue between Ba and Hoa about uncle Nghia, a pilot, Listen comprehention the listening and complete the schedule”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 1 /P. 99 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 16. People and place - A. 4. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./05/2012. Period: 97. UNIT 16. PEOPLE AND PLACE A. 3. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about some names of countries and cities and the different tour places in Asia. Listen and get information about the pilot’s schedule. Ss can play in roll the pilot and rewrite his adventure. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love flights study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbook, teacher's book, sub-board, cassettle player, tape. 2. Students’: Textbook, workbook..

(271) III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………… 2. Check up: * Requirement: Write names of countries and capitals * Key: Thailand Bangkok Cambodia PhnomPenh China Beijing Indonesia Jakarta Laos Vientain ………… ……………. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss to look at the picture and * Cue questions: asks Ss some questions. + Who is this? Ss: Answer. + What does he do? T: Gives the remarks. + Do you want to become a pilot? …………………………………….. 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Presents about the listening: Listen about the pilot’s schedule. Ss: Listens to the teacher. * Vocabulary: T: Plays the tape once and presents - fly (flew): bay vocabulary. - night: đêm Ss: Listen and write down. - a cultural show: biểu diễn văn hóa T: Guides Ss to practice the words. - Balinese dancers: vũ điệu ba lê Ss: Practice. * Structures: T: Asks Ss to repeat the past simple. S + P1 Ss: Repeat. Ex: I flew to Bangkok. I went to a cultural show and saw some Balinese. 3.3 Practice: (22’) T: Plays the tape twice and asks Ss to 1. Listen and complete the pilot’s schedule with the correct place names: complete the schedule in group of 6’ five.(diliver cards) Ss: Work in group of five..

(272) T: Checks the answers. Ss: Exchange the answers. T: Plays the tape one more time, corrects and gives key(sub-board). Ss: Listen and corrects.. T: Asks Ss to retell about the pilot’s schedule. Ss: Retell. T: Listens and helps Ss to retell. T: Asks Ss to rewrite the pilot’s schedule. Ss: Rewrite. T: Helps Ss to write.. * Key: Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday. Bangkok and Singapore. Singapore Jakarta Bali Bali Hong Kong back to Ha Noi. 2. Retell and rewrite the pilot’s schedule:. Example: On Monday, I flew to Bangkok and then to Singapore………. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “listen and complete the pilot’s schedule, rewrite the pilot’s schedule”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 2 /P. 100 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 16. People and place - A. 4. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./05/ 2012. Period: 98. UNIT 16. PEOPLE AND PLACE A. 4. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:.

(273) 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to read comprehention the text about destinations to travel in Asia and answer the questions. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading skill. 3. Attitude: Love the traveling some famous places in Asia, get to know the famous places, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbook, teacher's book, sub-board, cassettle player, tape. 2. Students’: Textbook, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Retell the pilot’s schedule. * Key: On Monday, he flew to Bangkok and then to Singapore. On Wednesday he flew to ……………………………….. 3. Newllesson: Teacher and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Cue questions: T: Asks Ss some questions. + Do you like traveling? Ss: Answer. + Where do you want to travel? T: Gives the remarks. + Do you like traveling to some countries in Asia? 3. 2 Presentation: (12’) T: Presents contents of the passage: talk about some famous places in some countries. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Asks Ss some questions. * What would you like to do if you go Ss: Answer. to Khe.mer temple of Angko Wat in Cambodia? T: Plays the tape once and presents * Vocabulary: vocabulary. - attraction(n) - shadow Ss : Listen and write down. - ancient (v) - puppet T: Guides Ss to practice the words. - monument(n) - resort Ss: Practice. - range - admire - Buddhist - coral - culture.

(274) - dance * Structure: Modal verb “may” Ex: You may prefer to play soccer. You may be interested in some different objects. T: Presents structures. Ss: Listen and write down.. 3.3 Practice: T: Plays the tape one more time. Ss: Listen and repeat. T: Calls Ss to read the passage. Ss: Read aloud. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read the questions and find out the answers in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Reads the answers. T: Corrects and gives key.. (20’) 1. Read the passage:. 2. Answer the questions:. * Key: a. The three kind of tourist attractions mentioned in the passage are ancient monuments, show and resorts. b. I prefer the ancient monuments(…). 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ read comprehention the passage about famous places in Asia”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 4, 5 /P.102 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 16. People and place - B. 1,2. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(275) Teaching date: 7A:…./05/ 2012. Period: 99. UNIT 16. PEOPLE AND PLACE B. 1,2. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about General Vo Nguyen Giap and famous places with his name, age and Viet Nam history and talk about famous soccer players. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading and speaking skill. 3. Attitude: Love the famous people, get to know about the famous people in Viet Nam, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbook, teacher's book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Textbook, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + What attractions does South East Asia have? + What could you visit if you are interested in history? + What do you see if you may be interested in the tradition ofdifferent cultures? * Key: - The South East Asia has ancient monuments, show and resorts. - If you are interested in history, you may visit ancient monuments. - …………………………………………………………… 3. Newllesson: Teacher and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) * Cue questions: T: Asks Ss some questions. + What do we call: Uncle Ho, Vo Ss: Answer. Nguyen Giap General, Lenin……? T: Gives the word. “famous people”: Nguoi noi tieng 3. 2 Presentation: (10’) T: Gives some places and asks Ss to + Bach Dang River, Hoan Kiem Lake, give the characters Kim Lien village…...

(276) Ss: Give the charaters. T: Presents Spot Dien Bien Phu with “Vo Nguyen Giap”. Ss: Listen to the teaher. T: Presents about the dialogue: Ba and Liz are playing the quiz about famous people “Vo Nguyen Giap”. Ss: Listen to the teacher. T: Reads the dialogue and presents vocabulary. Ss : Listen and write down. T: Guides Ss to practice the words. Ss: Practice. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listen and correct mistakes. T: Asks Ss to read the sentences and choose the true or false in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Give the answers. T: Corrects and gives key by subboard.. T: Asks Ss to read the words in the box and complete the dialogue in. + Characters: Ngo Quyen, Le Loi, Ho Chi Minh,...... * Vocabulary: -quiz (n) - famous (adj) - general (n) - lead (v) (22’) - battle (n). - to be born - happen (v) - force (n) - defeat (v) - defeat (v). 1. Practice reading the dialogue:. 5’ 2. Choose sentecnes. the. true. or. False. * Key: a.False: Liz knows nothings about General Giap. b. False: The people’s Army of Viet Nam defeated the French in 1954. c. True. d. False: General Giap was born in 1911. e. True. f. False: Ba will send Liz some history books. 3. Complete the dialogue with the words in the box: (P.158/textbook).

(277) pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Gives key by sub-board. T: Asks Ss to make the new dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes.. * Key: (1) like (3) guess (2) prefer (4) favorite * Make the new dialogue: Tuan: Do you like Quang Thang? Hung: No, not very much. I prefer Xuan Hinh. Tuan: Why? Hung: Because Xuan Hinh is more funny than Quang Thang. Tuan: What about you? ………………………………………... 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ read comprehention the dialogue about famous people in Viet Nam : Vo Nguyen Giap General and famous soccer players”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 1, 2 /P.102- 103 in workbook. - Prepare: Unit 16. People and place - B. 4,5. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./05/ 2012. Period: 100. UNIT 16. PEOPLE AND PLACE B. 4,5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to talk about the famous characters such as: science, literature, sports, music…. Listen and get information about uncle Ho’s biography. - Write about uncle Ho base on the listened information..

(278) 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the reading and listening skill. 3. Attitude: Love the famous people, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Textbook, teacher's book, picture, sub-board. 2. Students’: Textbook, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up: (5’) * Requirement: Answer the questions: + When did the People’s Army of Viet Nam defeat the Friench? + Who lead the battle? * Key: - The People’s Army of Viet Nam defeated the Fench in 1954. - Vo Nguyen Giap General lead the battle. 3. Newllesson: Teacher and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (7’) T: Gives the picture and asks Ss * Cue questions: some questions. + Do you know Tho mas Edison and Ss: Answer. Hans Christian Andersen? + Where were they born and grew up? + What did they do? 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Reads the texts and presents newwords. * Vocabulary: Ss : Listen and write down. - lightbulb (n) - University (n) T: Guides Ss to practice the words. - establish (v) - poetry (n) Ss: Practice. - gramophone (n) - tale (n) - motion (n) - grow up (v) - Danish (n) - author (n) 3.3 Practice: (19’) T: Asks Ss to read the texts. 1. Practice reading the passage: Ss: Read silent. T: Calls some Ss to read the passages. Ss: Read aloud..

(279) T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to play in role : one student is Mr. Edisen, the other is a newspaper reporter and change roles in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Reads the passage twice and asks Ss to complete the table in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Gives Key by sub-board. Ss: Compare and write the answers down.. 2. Work with a partner: Asking and answering about Thomas Edition and Hans Christian Andersen:. * Cue: S1: When were you born Edisen? S2: I was born in 1847. S1: Were you born in America? S2: Yes, I was. …………………………… 2. Listen . Complete the table about President Ho Chi Minh:. * Key: Date of birth Left Viet Nam. year 1890 1911. Place Kim Lien Nha Rong Habor. Worked in hotel went to another country. 1900s London 1917 Paris. Moved again. 1923 1930. Founded Vietnamese. communist Party Formed Viet 1941 Minh Font Became President 1945. Died. 1969. Mosow Guangzhou Viet Nam Ha Noi Ha Noi. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “ read comprehention the text about famous people ”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises: 5 /P. 103 in workbook. - Prepare: Language Focus 5.

(280) * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…../05/2012. Period: 101. LANGUAGE FOCUS 5. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review and consolidate the knowledge learned from Unit 13o Unit 16. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the speaking and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love studying English, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, teacher's book, pictures in the book, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) * Requirement: Retell about Uncle Ho. * Key: - Uncle Ho was born in Kim Lien village, Nghe An province. He left Viet Nam in 1911. He worked in hotel in London. After six years, he went to Paris for one year. He moved to Guangzhou ………. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss to check the correct box. * Adjectives - Adverbs Ss: Complete the table. Adjective Adverb T: Gives the remarks. slowly dangerous skillfully good bad quickly (5’).

(281) 3. 2 Activity 1: T: Asks Ss to read the sentences and complete them. Ss: Complete the sentences. T: Corrects and gives key. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens nd corrects mistakes. 3.3 Activity 2: T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and read the words and make the similar dialogue in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practce. T: Listens, corrects and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to read the words and look at the pictures and give advices. Ss: Practice. T: Checks some Ss.. 1. Exercise 1: Adjectives and adverbs:. * Key: A. quickly B. slowly (7’). C. slowly D. good. E. skillful. 2. Modal verbs: a. Read the dialogue:. b. Make up similar dialogues:. * Key: + Can I play soccer, Mom? First you must practice the piano. + Can I play badminton, Mom? First, you must clean up your room. + Can I go fishing, Mom? First you must post this letter. + Can I watch TV, Mom? First you must go to the market. + Can I go roller-skating, Mom? First, you must go to the library. c. Give her some advice, using should or ought to: Ex: You should take aspirins..

(282) Ss: Say. 3. 4 Activity 3: T: Presents about the situation of the exercise. Ss: Lsten to the teacher. T: Asks Ss to look at the menu and the cue words to make the dialogue. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. T: Asks Ss to look at the pictures and make up the similar dialouge in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Listens and corrects mistakes. 3. 5 Activity 4: T: Asks Ss to look at the table and chek the correct column in group of six. Ss: Work in group of six. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Gives the answer by sub-board. Ss: Compare.. (5’). (6’). 3. Exercise 3. Expressing likes or dislikes:. Ex: S1: What would you like to eat? S2: I,d like shrimp cake. S1: Would you like fresh fish with lemon sauce? S2: yes. That sounds nice. S1: Would you like ginger chicken? S2: I prefer sweet and sour chicken. 4. Tenses:. * Key: Past. 3. 6 Activity 5. T: Asks Ss to read the dialogue in. (6’). a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Present Future V V. V V V V V V V V.

(283) pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Asks Ss to make the similar dialogues in pair. Ss: Work in pair. T: Checks some pairs. Ss: Practice. T: Feedbacks.. Ex: A: What is your favorite color, B? B: Pink. A: Why? B: Because iyt is very beautiful.. 4. Consolidation: (4’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Review and consolidate the knowledge learned from Unit 13 to Unit 16”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (1’) - Do exercises. - Prepare: Review Unit 9 + Unit 10. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./05/2012. Period: 102. REVIEW 1. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review and consolidate the knowledge learned in Unit 9 + Unit 10. 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the speaking and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love studying English, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, workbook, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’).

(284) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) - Check the exercises. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Asks Ss to change the verb into * Present Past past. + go went T: Gives the remarks. + see saw + visit visited + take took + talk talked + teach taught (8’) 3. 2 Presentation: T: Presents content of this lesson. + Past simple tense: SsListen and repeat. S + V-ed + be - was/ were + Regular – irregular: Ex: Go – went work - worked (20’) 3.3 Practice: T: Guides Ss to do some exercises. Exercise 2(P. 53): T: Asks Ss to complete the sentences. Ss: Complete the sentences. T: Checks the answer. Ss: Read the answer.. T: Listens, corrects mistakes and * Key: gives key. a. saw f. bought b. went g. was c. took h. returned d. spoke i. taught e. received j. were T: Asks Ss to make questions. * Exercise 3 (P. 56). Ss: Make questions T: Calls Ss to read the questions. Ss: Read aloud..

(285) T: Corrects and gives key.. * Key: b. When did we decorate our classroom? c. Whey did Hoa try on? d. Who did he talk to? * Exercise 2(P.64):. T: Asks Ss to makes questions. Ss: write the questions. T: Checks some Ss. Ss: Read the questions. T: Corrects and gives key. * Key: Ss: Work in group of six. b. Who did Minh see this morning? T: Checks the answers. c. When did Hoa also visit the Ss: Read the answers. dentist? T: Gives the answer by sub-board. Ss: Compare. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Review and consolidate the knowledge learned in Unit9 + Unit 10”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (1’) - Do exercises. - Prepare: Review Unit 11 + Unit 12. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................................... Teaching date: 7A: ……/05/2012. Period: 103. REVIEW 2.

(286) I. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to review and consolidate the knowledge learned in Unit 11 + Unit 12. + What’s the matter wrong? + too, so, neither, either. and but 2. Skill: Pairwork. To develop the speaking and writing skill. 3. Attitude: Love studying English, study seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Text book, workbook, sub-board. 2. Students’: Text book, workbook. III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…./ 17 out:…………………………… 2. Check up:(5’) - Check the exercises. 3. Newlesson: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 3.1 Warm up: (5’) T: Gives some sentences.(sub-board) * Complete the sentences: Ss: Complete the sentences. + A: I like coffee. B: ………………, too. + A: I don’t like chicken. B: ……………………….., either. T: Crrects and gives key. * Key: + B: I like coffee ,too. + B: I don’t like chicken, either. 3. 2 Presentation: (8’) T: Presents content of this lesson. + What’s wrong with you? SsListen and repeat. I have a headache. + How height/ weight are you? - I’m …….kilo(s)/ meter. + too, so, either, neither: - Too/ So: Ex: A: I like carrots. B: I like carrots, too. So do I. - Either/ Neither:.

(287) Ex: A: I don’t like chicken. B: I don’t like chicken, either. Neither do I. 3.3 Practice: T: Asks Ss to complete the sentences. Ss: Complete the sentences. T: Checks the answer. Ss: Read the answer.. T: Listens, corrects mistakes and gives key.. T: Asks Ss to complete the sentences. Ss: Complete the sentences. T: Calls Ss to read the completed sentences. Ss: Read aloud.. T: Corrects and gives key.. (19’) Exercise 2. (74):. * Key: b. I am not thirsty, either. c. They like potatoes and peas too. d. neither do they. Exercise 1. complete the sentences: a. A: I like apple. B: I like apple,…… b. Nam likes coffee. Hoa likes coffee, … c. Lan: I don’t like potatoes. Mai: …..do I. d. I and Hoa don’t like cucumbers. They don’t like cucumbers, ……. * Key: a. B:….., too. d. …..either. b. …, too. c. Neither…….. 4. Consolidation: (5’) T: Retells the main content of the lesson “Review and consolidate the knowledge learned in Unit 11 + Unit 12”. Ss: Listen and say again. 5. Homework: (2’) - Do exercises. - Prepare: Do the second term written test. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. ...............................................................................................................................................

(288) .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A:…./05/2012. Period: 104. THE SECOND TERM WRITTEN TEST THI THEO ĐỀ CỦA PHÒNG GIÁO DỤC.. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy: .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. Ngày……..tháng……..năm 2012.. ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………….... ............................................................................................................................. Teaching date: 7A: ….../05/2012. Period: 105. CORRECT THE SECOND TERM WRITTEN TEST. I. Objective : By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Ss will be able to correct the mistakes in the second term written test. 2. Skill: To develop listening, speaking ,writing and reading skill. 3. Attitude: Correct the test seriously. II. Preparation: 1. Teacher’s: Papers, key. 2. Students’: notebook, pen..

(289) III. Procedure : 1. Organization :(1’) 7A:…/17. out:…………………. 2. Correct the test: Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Time Content 2.1 Warm up: (4’) * Cue questions: T: Asks some questions: + How are you? Ss: Answer the teacher. + Are there any difficult exercises? + Have you done the test well? T: Remarks the test. 2. 2 Task 1: (5’) Question I: T: Reads the passage once again and asks Ss to read the answers. Ss: Gives the answers. T: Reads the passage one more time * Key: and gives the key. 1. big 2. good Ss: Listen and check. 3. small 4. two/2 2. 3 Task 2: (7’) Question II: T: Calls Ss to read the passage. * True (T), False (F) : Ss: Read the passage aloud. T: Checks the answers. Ss: Read the answers. * Key: 1. F 2. T 3.F T: Corrects and gives the key. 4. T 5. F 2. 4 Task 3: (7’) Question III: T: Calls Ss to read the sentences and the best answers. Ss: Read the answers. T: Gives key and explains. Ss: Listen and write down. 2. 5 Task 4: T: Calls Ss to write the verbs in the past. Ss: Write the words on the board. T: Corrects and gives key.. (6’). * Key: 1–B 2–C 5–B 6–C Question IV :. * Key: 1. arrived. 3–A 7–D. 2. visited. 4–A 8–A. 3. went.

(290) 4. took 2. 6 Task 5: T: Calls Ss to write the sentences on the board. Ss: Write on the board. T: Corrects mistakes and gives the key.. 5. received. 6. put. (8’). * Key: 1. Long is a quick swimmer. 2. Don’t forget to do your homework. 3. I eat bread for breakfast and so does my sister. 4. Nam watched a soccer match last night./ Last night, nam watched a soccer match.. 3. Consolidation: (5’) T: Repeats the main ideas of this lesson: “correct mistakes in the test”. Ss: Listen and say again. 4. Homework: (2’) - Prepare: Review all the units learned. * Những lưu ý, kinh nghiệm rút ra sau giờ dạy:. ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ .............................................................................................................................

(291)

(292)

Giao an anh 7

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về